Solaris 10 Installation Guide:

Custom JumpStart and Advanced

Installations

Sun Microsystems, Inc.

4150 Network Circle
Santa Clara, CA 95054
U.S.A.

Part No: 817–5506–10

January 2005
Copyright 2005 Sun Microsystems, Inc. 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, CA 95054 U.S.A. All rights reserved.

This product or document is protected by copyright and distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying, distribution, and decompilation. No
part of this product or document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Sun and its licensors, if any.
Third-party software, including font technology, is copyrighted and licensed from Sun suppliers.
Parts of the product may be derived from Berkeley BSD systems, licensed from the University of California. UNIX is a registered trademark in the U.S.
and other countries, exclusively licensed through X/Open Company, Ltd.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo, docs.sun.com, AnswerBook, AnswerBook2, JumpStart, Solaris Flash, Sun Java, and Solaris are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or
registered trademarks of SPARC International, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. Products bearing SPARC trademarks are based upon an
architecture developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
The OPEN LOOK and Sun™ Graphical User Interface was developed by Sun Microsystems, Inc. for its users and licensees. Sun acknowledges the
pioneering efforts of Xerox in researching and developing the concept of visual or graphical user interfaces for the computer industry. Sun holds a
non-exclusive license from Xerox to the Xerox Graphical User Interface, which license also covers Sun’s licensees who implement OPEN LOOK GUIs
and otherwise comply with Sun’s written license agreements.
U.S. Government Rights – Commercial software. Government users are subject to the Sun Microsystems, Inc. standard license agreement and
applicable provisions of the FAR and its supplements.
DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE
DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID.

Copyright 2005 Sun Microsystems, Inc. 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, CA 95054 U.S.A. Tous droits réservés.
Ce produit ou document est protégé par un copyright et distribué avec des licences qui en restreignent l’utilisation, la copie, la distribution, et la
décompilation. Aucune partie de ce produit ou document ne peut être reproduite sous aucune forme, par quelque moyen que ce soit, sans
l’autorisation préalable et écrite de Sun et de ses bailleurs de licence, s’il y en a. Le logiciel détenu par des tiers, et qui comprend la technologie relative
aux polices de caractères, est protégé par un copyright et licencié par des fournisseurs de Sun.
Des parties de ce produit pourront être dérivées du système Berkeley BSD licenciés par l’Université de Californie. UNIX est une marque déposée aux
Etats-Unis et dans d’autres pays et licenciée exclusivement par X/Open Company, Ltd.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, le logo Sun, docs.sun.com, AnswerBook, AnswerBook2, JumpStart, Solaris Flash, Sun Java, et Solaris sont des marques de
fabrique ou des marques déposées, de Sun Microsystems, Inc. aux Etats-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Toutes les marques SPARC sont utilisées sous
licence et sont des marques de fabrique ou des marques déposées de SPARC International, Inc. aux Etats-Unis et dans d’autres pays. Les produits
portant les marques SPARC sont basés sur une architecture développée par Sun Microsystems, Inc.
L’interface d’utilisation graphique OPEN LOOK et Sun™ a été développée par Sun Microsystems, Inc. pour ses utilisateurs et licenciés. Sun reconnaît
les efforts de pionniers de Xerox pour la recherche et le développement du concept des interfaces d’utilisation visuelle ou graphique pour l’industrie
de l’informatique. Sun détient une licence non exclusive de Xerox sur l’interface d’utilisation graphique Xerox, cette licence couvrant également les
licenciés de Sun qui mettent en place l’interface d’utilisation graphique OPEN LOOK et qui en outre se conforment aux licences écrites de Sun.
CETTE PUBLICATION EST FOURNIE “EN L’ETAT” ET AUCUNE GARANTIE, EXPRESSE OU IMPLICITE, N’EST ACCORDEE, Y COMPRIS DES
GARANTIES CONCERNANT LA VALEUR MARCHANDE, L’APTITUDE DE LA PUBLICATION A REPONDRE A UNE UTILISATION
PARTICULIERE, OU LE FAIT QU’ELLE NE SOIT PAS CONTREFAISANTE DE PRODUIT DE TIERS. CE DENI DE GARANTIE NE
S’APPLIQUERAIT PAS, DANS LA MESURE OU IL SERAIT TENU JURIDIQUEMENT NUL ET NON AVENU.

041129@10536
 Contents

Preface 9

Part I Overall Planning of Any Solaris Installation or Upgrade 13

1 Solaris Installation and Upgrade (Roadmap) 15

Task Map: Installing or Upgrading the Solaris Software 15
Installing From the Network or From DVD or CDs? 18
Initial Installation, or Upgrade? 19
Initial Installation 19
Upgrade 19
Choosing a Solaris Installation Method 20
Sun Java System Application Server Platform Edition 8 21

2 Solaris Installation and Upgrade (Planning) 23

System Requirements and Recommendations 23
Allocating Disk and Swap Space 25
General Disk Space Planning and Recommendations 25
Disk Space Recommendations for Software Groups 27
Upgrade 29
Upgrade Limitations 29
Upgrade Programs 29
Installing a Solaris Flash Archive Instead of Upgrading 30
Upgrading With Disk Space Reallocation 31
Using the Solaris Installation Program to Upgrade From DVD or CD Media 32
Backing Up Systems Before Upgrading 32

3
 How to Find the Version of the Solaris OS That Your System Is Running 32
Locale Values 32
Platform Names and Groups 33
Planning to Install and Configure Zones 33
Disk Space Requirements for Non-Global Zones 34
Restricting Non-Global Zone Size 35
SPARC: 64–bit Packaging Changes 35
x86: Partitioning Recommendations 36
Default Boot-Disk Partition Layout Preserves the Service Partition 36

Part II Using Custom JumpStart 37

3 Custom JumpStart (Overview) 39

Custom JumpStart Introduction 39
Custom JumpStart Example Scenario 39
How the JumpStart Program Installs Solaris Software 40

4 Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations (Tasks) 45

Task Map: Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations 45
Creating a Profile Server for Networked Systems 47
▼ To Create a JumpStart Directory on a Server 47
▼ To Allow All Systems Access to the Profile Server 49
Creating a Profile Diskette for Standalone Systems 51
▼ SPARC: To Create a Profile Diskette 51
▼ x86: To Create a Profile Diskette 53
Creating the rules File 56
Syntax of the rules File 56
▼ To Create a rules File 57
rules File Example 58
Creating a Profile 59
Syntax of Profiles 60
▼ To Create a Profile 60
Profile Examples 61
Testing a Profile 70
▼ To Create a Temporary Solaris Environment to Test a Profile 71
▼ To Test a Profile 72
Profile Test Examples 74

4 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 Validating the rules File 75
▼ To Validate the rules File 75

5 Using Optional Custom JumpStart Features (Tasks) 77

Creating Begin Scripts 77
Important Information About Begin Scripts 78
Creating Derived Profiles With a Begin Script 78
Creating Finish Scripts 79
Important Information About Finish Scripts 79
▼ To Add Files With a Finish Script 80
Adding Packages or Patches With a Finish Script 80
Customizing the Root Environment With a Finish Script 83
Setting a System’s Root Password With a Finish Script 83
Non-Interactive Installations With Finish Scripts 85
Creating a Compressed Configuration File 85
▼ To Create a Compressed Configuration File 85
Compressed Configuration File Example 86
Creating Disk Configuration Files 86
▼ SPARC: To Create a Disk Configuration File 86
SPARC: Disk Configuration File Example 88
▼ x86: To Create a Disk Configuration File 88
x86: Disk Configuration File Example 90
Using a Site-Specific Installation Program 92

6 Creating Custom Rule and Probe Keywords (Tasks) 93

Probe Keywords 93
Creating a custom_probes File 94
Syntax of the custom_probes File 94
Syntax of Function Names in custom_probes 95
▼ To Create a custom_probes File 95
Examples of a custom_probes File and Keyword 95
Validating the custom_probes File 97
▼ To Validate the custom_probes File 97

7 Performing a Custom JumpStart Installation (Tasks) 99

SPARC: Task Map: Setting Up a System for a Custom JumpStart Installation 99
SPARC: Performing a Custom JumpStart Installation 101

5
 ▼ To Prepare to Install a Solaris Flash Archive With a Custom JumpStart
Installation 101
▼ SPARC: To Perform an Installation or Upgrade With the Custom JumpStart
Program 103
x86: Task Map: Setting Up a System for a Custom JumpStart Installation 105
x86: Performing a Custom JumpStart Installation 106
▼ x86: To Perform an Installation or Upgrade With the Custom JumpStart
Program 106

8 Installing With Custom JumpStart (Examples) 111

Sample Site Setup 111
Create an Install Server 113
x86: Create a Boot Server for Marketing Systems 114
Create a JumpStart Directory 115
Share the JumpStart Directory 115
SPARC: Create the Engineering Group’s Profile 115
x86: Create the Marketing Group’s Profile 116
Update the rules File 117
Validate the rules File 117
SPARC: Set Up Engineering Systems to Install From the Network 118
x86: Set Up Marketing Systems to Install From the Network 118
SPARC: Boot the Engineering Systems and Install Solaris 10 Software 119
x86: Boot the Marketing Systems and Install Solaris 10 Software 120

9 Custom JumpStart (Reference) 121

Rule Keywords and Values 121
Profile Keywords and Values 125
Profile Keywords Quick Reference 126
Profile Keyword Descriptions and Examples 127
Custom JumpStart Environment Variables 165
Probe Keywords and Values 167

Part III Using RAID-1 Volumes 169

10 Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors) During Installation (Overview) 171

Why Use RAID-1 Volumes? 171
How Do RAID-1 Volumes Work? 172

6 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 Overview of Solaris Volume Manager Components 174
State Database and State Database Replicas 174
RAID-0 Volumes (Concatenations) 175
RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors) 176
Example of RAID-1 Volume Disk Layout 177

11 Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors) During Installation (Planning) 179

System Requirement 179
State Database Replicas Guidelines and Requirements 180
Selecting Slices for State Database Replicas 180
Choosing the Number of State Database Replicas 181
Distributing State Database Replicas Across Controllers 181
RAID-1 and RAID-0 Volume Requirements and Guidelines 181
Custom JumpStart and Solaris Live Upgrade Guidelines 181
Guidelines for Selecting Disks and Controllers 184
Guidelines for Selecting Slices 184
How Booting Into Single-User Mode Affects RAID-1 Volumes 185

Part IV Appendixes 187

A Troubleshooting (Tasks) 189

Problems With Setting Up Network Installations 189
Problems With Booting a System 190
Booting From Media, Error Messages 190
Booting From Media, General Problems 191
Booting From the Network, Error Messages 193
Booting From the Network, General Problems 196
Initial Installation of the Solaris OS 196
▼ x86: To Check IDE Disk for Bad Blocks 197
Upgrading the Solaris OS 198
Upgrading, Error Messages 198
Upgrading, General Problems 199
▼ To Continue Upgrading After a Failed Upgrade 200
▼ System Panics When Upgrading With Solaris Live Upgrade Running Veritas
VxVm 200
x86: Service Partition Not Created by Default on Systems With No Existing Service
Partition 202

7
 ▼ To Install Software From a Network Installation Image or From the Solaris 10
Operating System DVD 203
▼ To Install From the Solaris 10 Software - 1 CD or From a Network Installation
Image 203

B Additional SVR4 Packaging Requirements (Reference) 205

Preventing Modification of the Current Solaris OS 205
Using Absolute Paths 205
Using the pkgadd -R Command 206
Differences Between $PKG_INSTALL_ROOT and $BASEDIR Overview 206
Guidelines for Writing Scripts 207
Maintaining Diskless Client Compatibility 208
Verifying Packages 208
Preventing User Interaction When Installing or Upgrading 209
For More Information 210

Glossary 213

Index 229

8 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
Preface

This book describes how to install and upgrade the Solaris™ 10 OS on both networked
and nonnetworked SPARC® and x86 architecture based systems. This book covers
using the custom JumpStart installation method and the creation of RAID-1 volumes
during installation.

This book does not include instructions about how to set up system hardware or other
peripherals.

Note – This Solaris release supports systems that use the SPARC and x86 families of
processor architectures: UltraSPARC®, SPARC64, AMD64, Pentium, and Xeon EM64T.
The supported systems appear in the Solaris 10 Hardware Compatibility List at
http://www.sun.com/bigadmin/hcl. This document cites any implementation
differences between the platform types.

In this document the term “x86” refers to 64-bit and 32-bit systems manufactured
using processors compatible with the AMD64 or Intel Xeon/Pentium product families.
For supported systems, see the Solaris 10 Hardware Compatibility List.

Who Should Use This Book

This book is intended for system administrators responsible for installing the Solaris
OS. This book provides both of the following types of information.
■ Advanced Solaris installation information for enterprise system administrators
who manage multiple Solaris machines in a networked environment
■ Basic Solaris installation information for system administrators who perform
infrequent Solaris installations or upgrades

9
 Related Books
Table P–1 lists related information that you need when you install the Solaris software.

TABLE P–1 Related Information

Information Description

Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Basic Installations Describes a basic OS installation with a graphical user
interface (GUI).

Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Network-Based Describes how to perform a remote Solaris installation over a
Installations local area network or a wide area network.

Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Describes how to create the files and directories necessary to
Advanced Installations perform an unattended custom JumpStart™ installation. This
book also describes how to create RAID-1 volumes.

Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Solaris Live Upgrade and Provides planning information when using CD or DVD
Upgrade Planning media to upgrade a system to the Solaris OS. This book also
describes how to use Solaris Live Upgrade to create and
upgrade new boot environments.

Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Solaris Flash Archives Provides instructions for creating Solaris Flash archives and
(Creation and Installation) using Solaris Flash archives to install the Solaris OS on
multiple systems.

System Administration Guide: Devices and File Describes how to back up system files and other system
Systems administration tasks.

Solaris 10 Release Notes Describes any bugs, known problems, software that is being
discontinued, and patches that are related to the Solaris
release.

SPARC: Solaris 10 Sun Hardware Platform Guide at Contains information about supported hardware.
http://docs.sun.com

Solaris 10 Package List Lists and describes the packages in the Solaris 10 OS.

x86: Solaris Hardware Compatibility List Contains supported hardware information and device
configuration.

Accessing Sun Documentation Online

The docs.sun.comSM Web site enables you to access Sun technical documentation
online. You can browse the docs.sun.com archive or search for a specific book title or
subject. The URL is http://docs.sun.com.

10 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
Ordering Sun Documentation
Sun Microsystems offers select product documentation in print. For a list of
documents and how to order them, see “Buy printed documentation” at
http://docs.sun.com.

Typographic Conventions
The following table describes the typographic changes used in this book.

TABLE P–2 Typographic Conventions

Typeface or Symbol Meaning Example

AaBbCc123 The names of commands, files, and Edit your .login file.
directories; on-screen computer output
Use ls -a to list all files.
machine_name% you have
mail.

AaBbCc123 What you type, contrasted with machine_name% su

on-screen computer output
Password:

AaBbCc123 Command-line placeholder: replace with To delete a file, type rm

a real name or value filename.

AaBbCc123 Book titles, new words, or terms, or Read Chapter 6 in User’s Guide.
words to be emphasized.
These are called class options.
You must be root to do this.

Shell Prompts in Command Examples

The following table shows the default system prompt and superuser prompt for the C
shell, Bourne shell, and Korn shell.

11
 TABLE P–3 Shell Prompts

Shell Prompt

C shell prompt machine_name%

C shell superuser prompt machine_name#

Bourne shell and Korn shell prompt $

Bourne shell and Korn shell superuser prompt #

12 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 Overall Planning of Any Solaris
PART I Installation or Upgrade

This part guides you through planning the installation or upgrade of the Solaris
operating system when using any installation program.

13
14 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
CHAPTER 1

Solaris Installation and Upgrade

(Roadmap)

This chapter provides you with information about decisions you need to make before
you install or upgrade the Solaris Operating System (Solaris OS). This chapter contains
the following sections:
■ “Task Map: Installing or Upgrading the Solaris Software” on page 15
■ “Installing From the Network or From DVD or CDs?” on page 18
■ “Initial Installation, or Upgrade?” on page 19
■ “Choosing a Solaris Installation Method” on page 20
■ “Sun Java System Application Server Platform Edition 8” on page 21

Note – This book uses the term slice, but some Solaris documentation and programs
might refer to a slice as a partition.

x86: To avoid confusion, this book distinguishes between x86 fdisk partitions and the
divisions within the Solaris fdisk partition. The x86 fdisk divisions are called
partitions. The divisions within the Solaris fdisk partition are called slices.

Task Map: Installing or Upgrading the

Solaris Software
The following task map is an overview of the steps necessary to install or upgrade the
Solaris OS when using any installation program. Use this task map to identify all of
the decisions that you need to make to complete the most efficient installation for your
environment.

15
TABLE 1–1 Task Map: Installing or Upgrading the Solaris Software

Task Description For Instructions

Choose initial installation Decide if you want to perform an initial installation or “Initial Installation, or
or upgrade. an upgrade. Upgrade?” on page 19.

Choose an installation The Solaris OS provides several programs for “Choosing a Solaris
program. installation or upgrade. Choose the installation Installation Method” on page
method that is most appropriate for your 20.
environment.

(Solaris installation Decide which type installation is suitable for your For information about the Sun
program) Choose a environment: Java Enterprise System, see
default or custom ■ If you are using a graphical user interface (GUI) Sun Java Enterprise System
installation. you can choose a default or a custom installation: Technical Overview at
■ A default installation formats the hard disk http://docs.sun.com
and installs a preselected set of software,
including the Sun Java™ Enterprise System.
■ A custom installation enables you to modify
the hard disk layout and select the software
that you want to install.
■ If you use a text installer (non-graphical interface),
you can select the default values or edit the values
to select the software you want to install.

Review system Determine if your system meets the minimum Chapter 2.

requirements. Also, plan requirements to install or upgrade. Allocate disk
and allocate disk space space on your system for the components of the
and swap space. Solaris OS that you want to install. Determine the
appropriate swap-space layout for your system.

Choose to install a system Decide on the most appropriate installation media for “Installing From the Network
from local media or from your environment. or From DVD or CDs?”
the network. on page 18.

16 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
TABLE 1–1 Task Map: Installing or Upgrading the Solaris Software (Continued)
Task Description For Instructions

Gather information about ■ For the Solaris installation program, complete the ■ For the Solaris installation
your system. worksheet to collect all of the information that program, see either of the
you need to install or upgrade. following documents:
■ For the custom JumpStart installation method, ■ Chapter 3, “Gathering
decide which profile keywords to use in your Information Before
profile. Then review the keyword descriptions to Installation or
find the information about your system that you Upgrade (Planning),”
need. in Solaris 10 Installation
Guide: Network-Based
Installations
■ Chapter 3, “Gathering
Information Before
Upgrade (Planning),”
in Solaris 10 Installation
Guide: Solaris Live
Upgrade and Upgrade
Planning
■ For the custom JumpStart
installation method, see
Chapter 9.

(Optional) Set system You can preconfigure system information to avoid Chapter 4, “Preconfiguring
parameters. being prompted for the information during the System Configuration
installation or upgrade. Information (Tasks),” in
Solaris 10 Installation Guide:
Network-Based Installations.

(Optional) Prepare to If you chose to install the Solaris software from the To install over a local area
install the Solaris network, create an installation server, create a boot network, see Chapter 7,
software from the server (if necessary), and set up the systems to be “Preparing to Install From the
network. installed from the network. Network With CD Media
(Tasks),” in Solaris 10
Installation Guide:
Network-Based Installations.
To install over a wide area
network, see Chapter 11,
“Preparing to Install With
WAN Boot (Tasks),” in
Solaris 10 Installation Guide:
Network-Based Installations.

(Upgrade only) Perform Back up your system and determine if you can “Upgrade” on page 29.
tasks prior to upgrade. upgrade with disk space reallocation.

Perform an installation or Use the Solaris installation method that you chose to The chapter or chapters that
upgrade. install or upgrade the Solaris software. provide detailed instructions
for the installation programs.

Chapter 1 • Solaris Installation and Upgrade (Roadmap) 17

TABLE 1–1 Task Map: Installing or Upgrading the Solaris Software (Continued)
Task Description For Instructions

Troubleshoot installation Review the troubleshooting information when you Appendix A.

problems encounter problems with your installation.

Installing From the Network or From

DVD or CDs?
The Solaris software is distributed on DVD or CD media so that you can install or
upgrade systems that have access to a DVD-ROM or CD-ROM drive.

You can set up the systems to install from the network with remote DVD or CD
images. You might want to set up systems this way for the following reasons:
■ If you have systems that do not have local DVD-ROM or CD-ROM drives
■ If you are installing several systems and do not want to insert the discs into every
local drive to install the Solaris software

You can use all of the Solaris installation methods to install a system from the network.
However, by installing systems from the network with the Solaris Flash installation
feature or with a custom JumpStart installation, you can centralize and automate the
installation process in a large enterprise. For more details about the different
installation methods, refer to “Choosing a Solaris Installation Method” on page 20.

Installing the Solaris software from the network requires initial setup. For information
about preparing to install from the network, choose one of the following options.

For detailed instructions about preparing to Chapter 7, “Preparing to Install From the
install from a local area network Network With CD Media (Tasks),” in Solaris 10
Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations

For instructions about preparing to install over Chapter 11, “Preparing to Install With WAN
a wide area network Boot (Tasks),” in Solaris 10 Installation Guide:
Network-Based Installations

For instructions about how to install x86 based “Booting and Installing Over the Network
clients over the network by using PXE With PXE” in Solaris 10 Installation Guide:
Network-Based Installations

18 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
Initial Installation, or Upgrade?
You can choose to perform an initial installation or, if your system is already running
the Solaris OS, you can upgrade your system.

Initial Installation
An initial installation overwrites the system’s disk with the new version of the Solaris
OS. If your system is not running the Solaris OS, you must perform an initial
installation.

If the system is already running the Solaris OS, you can choose to perform an initial
installation. If you want to preserve any local modifications, before you install, you
must back up the local modifications. After you complete the installation, you can
restore the local modifications.

You can use any of the Solaris installation methods to perform an initial installation.
For detailed information about the different Solaris installation methods, refer to
“Choosing a Solaris Installation Method” on page 20.

Upgrade
You can upgrade the Solaris OS by using two upgrade methods: standard and Solaris
Live Upgrade. A standard upgrade maintains as many existing configuration
parameters as possible of the current Solaris OS. Solaris Live Upgrade creates a copy
of the current system. This copy can be upgraded with a standard upgrade. The
upgraded Solaris OS can then be switched to become the current system by a simple
reboot. If a failure occurs, you can switch back to the original Solaris OS with a reboot.
Solaris Live Upgrade enables you to keep your system running while you upgrade
and enables you to switch back and forth between Solaris OS releases.

You can upgrade any system that is running the Solaris 7, Solaris 8, or Solaris 9
software. For more information about upgrading and the list of upgrade methods, see
“Upgrade” on page 29.

Chapter 1 • Solaris Installation and Upgrade (Roadmap) 19

 Choosing a Solaris Installation Method
The Solaris OS provides several programs for installation or upgrade. Each installation
technology offers different features that are designed for specific installation
requirements and environments. Use the following table to help you decide which
installation method to use.

TABLE 1–2 Choosing Your Installation Method

Task Installation Method Instructions

Install one system from CD-ROM or Solaris installation program Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Basic
DVD-ROM media with an Installations
interactive program.

Install one system over a local area Solaris installation program over the Part II, “Installing Over a Local Area
network. network Network,” in Solaris 10 Installation
Guide: Network-Based Installations

Automate the installation or Custom JumpStart Chapter 4

upgrade of multiple systems based
on profiles you create.

Replicate the same software and Solaris Flash archives Chapter 1, “Solaris Flash
configuration on multiple systems. (Overview),” in Solaris 10 Installation
Guide: Solaris Flash Archives (Creation
and Installation)

Install systems over a wide area WAN boot Chapter 9, “WAN Boot (Overview),”
network (WAN) or the Internet. in Solaris 10 Installation Guide:
Network-Based Installations

Upgrade a system while it is Solaris Live Upgrade Chapter 4, “Solaris Live Upgrade
running. (Overview),” in Solaris 10 Installation
Guide: Solaris Live Upgrade and
Upgrade Planning

After installing the Solaris OS, create Solaris Zones Chapter 16, “Introduction to Solaris
an isolated application environment. Zones,” in System Administration
Guide: Solaris Containers—Resource
Management and Solaris Zones

20 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 Sun Java System Application Server
Platform Edition 8
The Sun Java System Application Server Platform Edition 8 provides for broad
deployment of application services and web services. This software is automatically
installed with the Solaris OS. You can find documentation for the server in the
following areas:

For documentation See Sun Java System Application Server Platform Edition 8 QuickStart Guide in the
about starting the server installation directory at /docs/QuickStart.html

For the full Application http://docs.sun.com/db/coll/ApplicationServer8_04q2

Server documentation
set

For a tutorial http://java.sun.com/j2ee/1.4/docs/tutorial/doc/index.html

Chapter 1 • Solaris Installation and Upgrade (Roadmap) 21

22 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
CHAPTER 2

Solaris Installation and Upgrade

(Planning)

This chapter describes system requirements to install or upgrade to the Solaris OS.
General guidelines for planning the disk space and default swap space allocation are
also provided. This chapter contains the following sections:
■ “System Requirements and Recommendations” on page 23
■ “Allocating Disk and Swap Space” on page 25
■ “Upgrade” on page 29
■ “How to Find the Version of the Solaris OS That Your System Is Running” on page
32
■ “Locale Values” on page 32
■ “Platform Names and Groups” on page 33
■ “Planning to Install and Configure Zones” on page 33
■ “SPARC: 64–bit Packaging Changes” on page 35
■ “x86: Partitioning Recommendations” on page 36

System Requirements and

Recommendations
TABLE 2–1 Memory, Swap, and Processor Recommendations

System Size

Memory to install or upgrade 256 MB is the recommended size. 64 MB is the minimum size.
Note – Some optional installation features are enabled only when sufficient
memory is present. For example, if you install from a DVD with insufficient
memory, you install through the Solaris installation program ’s text installer,
not through the graphical user interface (GUI). For more information about
these memory requirements, see Table 2–2.

23
TABLE 2–1 Memory, Swap, and Processor Recommendations (Continued)
System Size

Swap area 512 Mbytes is the default size.

Note – You might need to customize the swap space. Swap space is based on
the size of the system’s hard disk.

x86: Processor requirements SPARC: 200–MHz or faster processor is required.

x86: 120–MHz or faster processor is recommended. Hardware floating-point
support is required.

You can choose to install the software with a GUI or with or without a windowing
environment. If there is sufficient memory, the GUI is displayed by default. Other
environments are displayed by default if memory is insufficient for the GUI. You can
override defaults with the nowin or text boot options. But, you are limited by the
amount of memory in your system or by installing remotely. Also if the Solaris
installation program does not detect a video adapter, it automatically displays in a
console-based environment. Table 2–2 describes these environments and lists minimal
memory requirements for displaying them.

TABLE 2–2 Memory Requirements for Display Options

Minimal Windowing
Memory Type of Installation Description Environment

64–127 MB Console-based Contains no graphics and no windowing environment. If

no video adapter is detected, the installer displays a
console-based environment.
If you are installing remotely through a tip line or using
the nowin boot option, you are limited to the
console-based installation.

128–383 MB Console-based Contains no graphics, but provides a window and the X

ability to open other windows. Requires a local or remote
DVD-ROM or CD-ROM drive or network connection,
video adapter, keyboard, monitor.
If you install by using the text boot option and have
enough memory, you are installing in a windowing
environment.

384MB or GUI-based Provides windows, pull-down menus, buttons, scrollbars, X

greater and iconic images. A GUI requires a local or remote
DVD-ROM or CD-ROM drive or network connection,
video adapter, keyboard, monitor.

24 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 Allocating Disk and Swap Space
Before you install the Solaris software, you can determine if your system has enough
disk space by doing some high-level planning.

General Disk Space Planning and

Recommendations
Planning disk space is different for everyone. Consider allocating space for the
following conditions, depending on your needs.

TABLE 2–3 General Disk Space and Swap Space Planning

Conditions for Space

Allocations Description

File systems For each file system that you create, allocate an additional 30 percent more disk
space than you need to enable you to upgrade to future Solaris versions.
By default, the Solaris installation methods create only root (/) and /swap. When
space is allocated for OS services, the /export directory is also created. If you are
upgrading to a major Solaris release, you might need to reslice your system or
allocate double the space that you need at installation time. If you are upgrading to
an update, you could prevent having to reslice your system by allocating extra disk
space for future upgrades. A Solaris update release needs approximately 10 percent
more disk space than the previous release. You can allocate an additional 30 percent
of disk space for each file system to allow space for several Solaris updates.

The /var file system If you intend to use the crash dump feature savecore(1M), allocate double the
amount of your physical memory in the /var file system.

Chapter 2 • Solaris Installation and Upgrade (Planning) 25

TABLE 2–3 General Disk Space and Swap Space Planning (Continued)
Conditions for Space
Allocations Description

Swap The Solaris installation program allocates a default swap area of 512 Mbytes under
the following conditions:
■ If you use the installation program’s automatic layout of disk slices
■ If you avoid manually changing the size of the swap slice
By default, the Solaris installation programs allocate swap space by placing swap so
that it starts at the first available disk cylinder (typically cylinder 0 on SPARC based
systems). This placement provides maximum space for the root (/) file system
during the default disk layout and enables the growth of the root (/) file system
during an upgrade.
If you think you might need to expand the swap area in the future, you can place
the swap slice so that it starts at another disk cylinder by using one of the following
methods.
■ For the Solaris installation program, you can customize the disk layout in
cylinder mode and manually assign the swap slice to the desired location.
■ For the custom JumpStart installation program, you can assign the swap slice in
the profile file. For more information about the JumpStart profile file, see
“Creating a Profile” on page 59.

For an overview of the swap space, see Chapter 20, “Configuring Additional Swap
Space (Tasks),” in System Administration Guide: Devices and File Systems.

A server that is providing By default, home directories are usually located in the /export file system.
home directory file systems

The Solaris software group A software group is a grouping of software packages. When you are planning disk
you are installing space, remember that you can add or remove individual software packages from the
software group that you select. For information about software groups, see “Disk
Space Recommendations for Software Groups” on page 27.

Upgrade ■ If you are using Solaris Live Upgrade to upgrade an inactive boot environment
and want information about disk space planning, see “Solaris Live Upgrade
Disk Space Requirements” in Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Solaris Live Upgrade and
Upgrade Planning.
■ If you are using other Solaris installation methods to plan disk space, see
“Upgrading With Disk Space Reallocation” on page 31.

Language support For example, Chinese, Japanese, or Korean.

Printing or mail support Allocate additional space.

Additional software or Allocate additional space.

third-party software

26 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
Disk Space Recommendations for Software Groups
The Solaris software groups are collections of Solaris packages. Each software group
includes support for different functions and hardware drivers.
■ For an initial installation, you select the software group to install, based on the
functions that you want to perform on the system.
■ For an upgrade, you must upgrade to a software group that is installed on the
system. For example, if you previously installed the End User Solaris Software
Group on your system, you cannot use the upgrade option to upgrade to the
Developer Solaris Software Group. However, during the upgrade you can add
software to the system that is not part of the currently installed software group.

When you are installing the Solaris software, you can choose to add or remove
packages from the Solaris software group that you selected. When you are selecting
which packages to add or remove, you need to know about software dependencies
and how the Solaris software is packaged.

The following figure shows the grouping of software packages. Reduced Network
Support contains the minimal number of packages and Entire Solaris Software Group
Plus OEM Support contains all the packages.

Entire Plus OEM

Entire

Developer

End User

Core

Reduce
Network
Support

FIGURE 2–1 Solaris Software Groups

Chapter 2 • Solaris Installation and Upgrade (Planning) 27

 Table 2–4 lists the Solaris software groups and the recommended amount of disk space
that you need to install each group.

Note – The disk space recommendations in Table 2–4 include space for the following
items.
■ Swap space
■ Patches
■ Additional software packages

You might find that the software groups require less disk space than the amount that
is listed in this table.

TABLE 2–4 Disk Space Recommendations for Software Groups

Software Group Description Recommended Disk Space

Entire Solaris Software Contains the packages for the Entire Solaris Software 6.7 Gbytes
Group Plus OEM Support Group plus additional hardware drivers, including
drivers for hardware that is not on the system at the
time of installation.

Entire Solaris Software Contains the packages for the Developer Solaris 6.5 Gbytes
Group Software Group and additional software that is needed
for servers.

Developer Solaris Software Contains the packages for the End User Solaris 6.0 Gbytes
Group Software Group plus additional support for software
development. The additional software development
support includes libraries, include files, man pages,
and programming tools. Compilers are not included.

End User Solaris Software Contains the packages that provide the minimum code 5.0 Gbytes
Group that is required to boot and run a networked Solaris
system and the Common Desktop Environment.

Core System Support Contains the packages that provide the minimum code 2.0 Gbytes
Software Group that is required to boot and run a networked Solaris
system.

Reduced Network Support Contains the packages that provide the minimum code 2.0 Gbytes
Software Group that is required to boot and run a Solaris system with
limited network service support. The Reduced
Network Support Software Group provides a multiuser
text-based console and system administration utilities.
This software group also enables the system to
recognize network interfaces, but does not activate
network services.

28 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
Upgrade
You can upgrade a system by using one of three different upgrade methods: Solaris
Live Upgrade, the Solaris installation program, and custom JumpStart.

TABLE 2–5 Solaris Upgrade Methods

Current Solaris OS Solaris Upgrade Methods

Solaris 7, Solaris 8, Solaris 9 ■ Solaris Live Upgrade – Upgrades a system by creating

and upgrading a copy of the running system
■ The Solaris installation program – Provides an interactive
upgrade with a graphical user interface or command-line
interface
■ Custom JumpStart method – Provides an automated
upgrade

Upgrade Limitations

Issue Description

Upgrading to a You cannot upgrade your system to a software group that is not installed
different software on the system. For example, if you previously installed the End User
group Solaris Software Group on your system, you cannot use the upgrade
option to upgrade to the Developer Solaris Software Group. However,
during the upgrade you can add software to the system that is not part
of the currently installed software group.

Using the Solaris You must have a free slice on the disk that does not store files and can be
installation program overwritten by the installation software. The swap slice is preferred, but
to upgrade from a you can use any slice that is not located in any of the “upgradable” root
CD or DVD slices that are listed in /etc/vfstab. The size of this slice must be at
least 512 Mbytes.

Upgrade Programs
You can perform a standard interactive upgrade with the Solaris installation program
or an unattended upgrade with the custom JumpStart installation method. Solaris Live
Upgrade enables you to upgrade a running system.

Chapter 2 • Solaris Installation and Upgrade (Planning) 29

Upgrade Program Description For More Information

Solaris Live Enables you to create a copy of the currently running To plan for disk space allocation
Upgrade system. The copy can be upgraded and then a reboot when using Solaris Live Upgrade,
switches the upgraded copy to become the currently see “Solaris Live Upgrade
running system. Using Solaris Live Upgrade reduces Requirements” in Solaris 10
the downtime that is required to upgrade the Solaris Installation Guide: Solaris Live Upgrade
OS. Also, Solaris Live Upgrade can prevent problems and Upgrade Planning.
with upgrading. An example is the inability to recover
from an upgrade if the power fails, because the copy
being upgraded is not the currently running system.

The Solaris Guides you through an upgrade with a GUI. Chapter 2, “Installing With the
installation Solaris Installation Program (Tasks),”
program in Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Basic
Installations.

Custom Provides an automated upgrade. A profile file and ■ For more information about
JumpStart optional preinstallation and postinstallation scripts testing the upgrade option, refer
program provide the information required. When creating a to “Testing a Profile” on page 70.
custom JumpStart profile for an upgrade, specify ■ For more information about
install_type upgrade. You must test the custom
creating a upgrade profile, see
JumpStart profile against the system’s disk
“Profile Examples” on page 61
configuration and currently installed software before
■ For more information about
you upgrade. Use the pfinstall -D command on the
system that you are upgrading to test the profile. You performing an upgrade, see
cannot test an upgrade profile by using a disk “SPARC: Performing a Custom
configuration file. JumpStart Installation” on page
101

Installing a Solaris Flash Archive Instead of

Upgrading
The Solaris Flash installation feature provides a method of creating a copy of the
whole installation from a master system that can be replicated on many clone systems.
This copy is called a Solaris Flash archive. You can install an archive by using any
installation program. For information about installing an archive, see the following
table.

Solaris Live Upgrade “Installing Solaris Flash Archives on a Boot

Environment” in Solaris 10 Installation Guide:
Solaris Live Upgrade and Upgrade Planning

Custom JumpStart Chapter 7

30 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
Solaris installation program Chapter 4, “Installing and Administering
Solaris Flash Archives (Tasks),” in Solaris 10
Installation Guide: Solaris Flash Archives
(Creation and Installation)

WAN boot installation method Chapter 12, “Installing With WAN Boot
(Tasks),” in Solaris 10 Installation Guide:
Network-Based Installations

Upgrading With Disk Space Reallocation

The upgrade option in the Solaris installation program and the upgrade keyword in
the custom JumpStart program provide the ability to reallocate disk space. This
reallocation automatically changes the sizes of the disk slices. You can reallocate disk
space if the current file systems do not have enough space for the upgrade. For
example, file systems might need more space for the upgrade for the following
reasons:
■ The Solaris software group that is currently installed on the system contains new
software in the new release. Any new software that is included in a software group
is automatically selected to be installed during the upgrade.
■ The size of the existing software on the system has increased in the new release.

The auto-layout feature attempts to reallocate the disk space to accommodate the new
size requirements of the file system. Initially, auto-layout attempts to reallocate space,
based on a set of default constraints. If auto-layout cannot reallocate space, you must
change the constraints on the file systems.

Note – Auto-layout does not have the ability to “grow” file systems. Auto-layout
reallocates space by the following process:
1. Backing up required files on the file systems that need to change.
2. Repartitioning the disks on the basis of the file system changes.
3. Restoring the backup files before the upgrade happens.

■ If you are using the Solaris installation program, and auto-layout cannot determine
how to reallocate the disk space, you must use the custom JumpStart program to
upgrade.
■ If you are using the custom JumpStart method to upgrade and you create an
upgrade profile, disk space might be a concern. If the current file systems do not
contain enough disk space for the upgrade, you can use the backup_media and
layout_constraint keywords to reallocate disk space. For an example of how
to use the backup_media and layout_constraint keywords in a profile, refer
to “Profile Examples” on page 61.

Chapter 2 • Solaris Installation and Upgrade (Planning) 31

 Using the Solaris Installation Program to Upgrade
From DVD or CD Media
When you use the Solaris installation program from a DVD or CD to upgrade, you
must have a slice on the disk that does not store files. The swap slice is preferred, but
you can use any slice that is not located in any of the upgradable root slices that are
listed in the /etc/vfstab. The size of this slice must be at least 512 Mbytes.

Backing Up Systems Before Upgrading

Backing up your existing file systems before you upgrade to the Solaris OS is highly
recommended. If you copy file systems to removable media, such as tape, you can
safeguard against data loss, damage, or corruption. For detailed instructions to back
up your system, refer to Chapter 23, “Backing Up and Restoring File Systems
(Overview),” in System Administration Guide: Devices and File Systems.

How to Find the Version of the Solaris

OS That Your System Is Running
To see the version of Solaris software that is running on your system, type either of the
following commands.
$ uname -a

The cat command provides more detailed information.

$ cat /etc/release

Locale Values
As a part of your installation, you can preconfigure the locale that you want the
system to use. A locale determines how online information is displayed in a specific
language and specific region. A language might also include more than one locale to
accommodate regional differences, such as differences in the format of date and time,
numeric and monetary conventions, and spelling.

You can preconfigure the system locale in a custom JumpStart profile or in the
sysidcfg file.

32 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
Setting the locale in a profile “Creating a Profile” on page 59.

Setting the locale in the sysidcfg file “Preconfiguring With the sysidcfg File” in
Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Network-Based
Installations

List of locale values International Language Environments Guide

Platform Names and Groups

When you are adding clients for a network installation, you must know your system
architecture (platform group). If you are writing a custom JumpStart installation rules
file, you need to know the platform name.

Some examples of platform names and groups follow. For a full list of SPARC based
systems, see Solaris 10 Sun Hardware Platform Guide at http://docs.sun.com/.
TABLE 2–6 Example of Platform Names and Groups

System Platform Name Platform Group

Sun Blade™ SUNW,Sun-Blade-100 sun4u

x86 based i86pc i86pc

Note – On a running system, you can also use the uname -i command to determine a
system’s platform name or the uname -m command to determine a system’s platform
group.

Planning to Install and Configure Zones

The following introduction provides high-level planning information for global and
non-global zones. For more specific planning information and specific procedures, see
Chapter 16, “Introduction to Solaris Zones,” in System Administration Guide: Solaris
Containers—Resource Management and Solaris Zones.

After the Solaris OS is installed, you can install and configure zones. In a zones
environment, the global zone is the single instance of the operating system that is
running and is contained on every Solaris system. The global zone is both the default
zone for the system and the zone that is used for system-wide administrative control.
A non-global zone is a virtualized operating system environment.

Chapter 2 • Solaris Installation and Upgrade (Planning) 33

 Solaris Zones are a software partitioning technology used to virtualize operating
system services and provide an isolated and secure environment for running
applications. When you create a zone, you produce an application execution
environment in which processes are isolated from all other zones. This isolation
prevents processes that are running in one zone from monitoring or affecting
processes that are running in any other zones. Even a process running in a non-global
zone with superuser credentials cannot view or affect activity in any other zones. A
process running in the global zone with superuser credentials can affect any process in
any zone.

The global zone is the only zone from which a non-global zone can be configured,
installed, managed, or uninstalled. Only the global zone is bootable from the system
hardware. Administration of the system infrastructure, such as physical devices,
routing, or dynamic reconfiguration (DR), is only possible in the global zone.
Appropriately privileged processes running in the global zone can access objects
associated with any or all other zones.

When installing the OS, the software group installed in the global zone is the set of
packages that is shared by all the non-global zones. For example, if you install the
Entire software group, all zones contain these packages. By default any additional
packages installed in the global zone also populate the non-global zones. You can
segregate into non-global zones applications, namespaces, servers, and network
connections such as NFS and DHCP as well as other software. Each non-global zone is
not aware of nor does it contain the segregated software in other non-global zones and
each can operate independently. For example, you might have installed the Entire
software group on the global zone and have running on separate non-global zones the
Java Enterprise System Messaging Server, a database, DHCP, and a web server. When
installing non-global zones keep in mind performance requirements of the
applications running in each non-global zone.

Disk Space Requirements for Non-Global Zones

When installing the global zone, be sure to reserve enough disk space to house all of
the zones you might create. Each non-global zone might have unique disk space
requirements. The following description is a brief overview of planning information.
For complete planning requirements and recommendations, see Chapter 18, “Planning
and Configuring Non-Global Zones (Tasks),” in System Administration Guide: Solaris
Containers—Resource Management and Solaris Zones.

No limits are placed on how much disk space can be consumed by a zone. The global
zone administrator is responsible for space restriction. Even a small uniprocessor
system can support a number of zones running simultaneously.

The nature of the packages installed in the global zone affects the space requirements
of the non-global zones that are created. The number of packages and space
requirements are factors. The following are general disk space guidelines.

34 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
■ Approximately 100 Mbytes of free disk space is suggested when the global zone
has been installed with all of the standard Solaris packages. Increase this amount if
additional packages are installed in the global zone. By default, any additional
packages installed in the global zone also populate the non-global zones. The
directory location in the non-global zone for these additional packages is specified
through the inherit-pkg-dir resource.
■ Add 40 Mbytes of RAM per zone if the system has sufficient swap space. This
addition is recommended to make each zone operational. When planning your
system size, consider this addition of RAM.

Restricting Non-Global Zone Size

The following options can be used to restrict zone size.
■ You can place the zone on a lofi-mounted partition. This action limits the amount
of space consumed by the zone to that of the file used by lofi. For more
information, see the lofiadm(1M) and lofi(7D) man pages.
■ You can use soft partitions to divide disk slices or logical volumes into partitions.
You can use these partitions as zone roots, and thus limit per-zone disk
consumption. The soft partition limit is 8192 partitions. For more information, see
Chapter 12, “Soft Partitions (Overview),” in Solaris Volume Manager Administration
Guide.
■ You can use the standard partitions of a disk for zone roots, and thus limit
per-zone disk consumption.

SPARC: 64–bit Packaging Changes

In previous Solaris releases, the Solaris OS was delivered in separate packages for
32-bit and 64-bit components. In the Solaris 10 OS, packaging has been simplified with
the delivery of most 32-bit and 64-bit components in a single package. The combined
packages retain the names of the original 32-bit packages, and the 64-bit packages are
no longer delivered. This change reduces the number of packages and simplifies
installation.

The 64-bit packages are renamed with the following conventions:

■ If a 64-bit package has a 32-bit counterpart, the 64-bit package is named with the
32-bit package name. For example, a 64-bit library such as
/usr/lib/sparcv9/libc.so.1 previously would have been delivered in SUNWcslx,
but now is delivered in SUNWcsl. The 64-bit SUNWcslx package is no longer
delivered.
■ If a package does not have a 32-bit counterpart, the “x” suffix is removed from the
name. For example, SUNW1394x becomes SUNW1394. This change means that you
might need to modify your custom JumpStart script or other package installation

Chapter 2 • Solaris Installation and Upgrade (Planning) 35

 scripts to remove references to the 64-bit packages.

x86: Partitioning Recommendations

When using the Solaris OS on x86 based systems, follow these guidelines for
partitioning your system.

The Solaris installation program uses a default boot-disk partition layout. These
partitions are called fdisk partitions. An fdisk partition is a logical partition of a disk
drive that is dedicated to a particular operating system on x86 based systems. To
install the Solaris software, you must set up at least one Solaris fdisk partition on an
x86 based system. x86 based systems allow up to four different fdisk partitions on a
disk. These partitions can be used to hold individual operating systems. Each
operating system must be located on a unique fdisk partition. A system can only
have one Solaris fdisk partition per disk.

TABLE 2–7 x86: Default Partitions

Partitions Partition Name Partition Size

First partition Diagnostic or Service partition Existing size on system

(on some
systems)

Second partition x86 boot partition Greater than 10 Mbytes, depending on disk
size

Third partition Solaris OS partition Remaining space on the boot disk

Default Boot-Disk Partition Layout Preserves the

Service Partition
The Solaris installation program uses a default boot-disk partition layout to
accommodate the diagnostic or Service partition. If your system currently includes a
diagnostic or Service partition, the default boot-disk partition layout enables you to
preserve this partition.

Note – If you install the Solaris OS on an x86 based system that does not currently
include a diagnostic or Service partition, the installation program does not create a
new diagnostic or Service partition by default. If you want to create a diagnostic or
Service partition on your system, see your hardware documentation.

36 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
PART II Using Custom JumpStart

This part provides instructions for creating, preparing, and performing custom
JumpStart installations.

37
38 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
CHAPTER 3

Custom JumpStart (Overview)

This chapter provides an introduction and overview to the custom JumpStart

installation process.
■ “Custom JumpStart Introduction” on page 39
■ “How the JumpStart Program Installs Solaris Software” on page 40

Custom JumpStart Introduction

The custom JumpStart installation method is a command–line interface that enables
you to automatically install or upgrade several systems, based on profiles that you
create. The profiles define specific software installation requirements. You can also
incorporate shell scripts to include preinstallation and postinstallation tasks. You
choose which profile and scripts to use for installation or upgrade. The custom
JumpStart installation method installs or upgrades the system, based on the profile
and scripts that you select. Also, you can use a sysidcfg file to specify configuration
information so that the custom JumpStart installation is completely hands-off.

Custom JumpStart Example Scenario

The custom JumpStart process can be described by using an example scenario. In this
example scenario, the systems need to be set up with the following parameters:
■ Install Solaris on 100 new systems.
■ Seventy of the systems are SPARC based systems that are owned by the
engineering group and need to be installed as standalone systems with the Solaris
OS software group for developers.
■ The remaining 30 systems are x86 based, owned by the marketing group and need
to be installed as standalone systems with the Solaris OS software group for end
users.

39
 First, the system administrator must create a rules file and a profile for each group of
systems. The rules file is a text file that contains a rule for each group of systems or
single systems on which you want to install the Solaris software. Each rule
distinguishes a group of systems that are based on one or more system attributes. Each
rule also links each group to a profile.

A profile is a text file that defines how the Solaris software is to be installed on each
system in the group. Both the rules file and profile must be located in a JumpStart
directory.

For the example scenario, the system administrator creates a rules file that contains
two different rules, one for the engineering group and another for the marketing
group. For each rule, the system’s network number is used to distinguish the
engineering group from the marketing group.

Each rule also contains a link to an appropriate profile. For example, in the rule for the
engineering group, a link is added to the profile, eng_profile, which was created
for the engineering group. In the rule for the marketing group, a link is added to the
profile, market_profile, which was created for the marketing group.

You can save the rules file and the profiles on a diskette or on a server.
■ A profile diskette is required when you want to perform custom JumpStart
installations on nonnetworked, standalone systems.
■ A profile server is used when you want to perform custom JumpStart installations
on networked systems that have access to a server.

After creating the rules file and profiles, validate the files with the check script. If
the check script runs successfully, the rules.ok file is created. The rules.ok is a
generated version of the rules file that the JumpStart program uses to install the
Solaris software.

How the JumpStart Program Installs

Solaris Software
After you validate the rules file and the profiles, you can begin a custom JumpStart
installation. The JumpStart program reads the rules.ok file. Then, the JumpStart
program searches for the first rule with defined system attributes that match the
system on which the JumpStart program is attempting to install the Solaris software. If
a match occurs, the JumpStart program uses the profile that is specified in the rule to
install the Solaris software on the system.

Figure 3–1 illustrates how a custom JumpStart installation works on a standalone,

nonnetworked system. The system administrator initiates the custom JumpStart
installation on Pete’s system. The JumpStart program accesses the rules files on the

40 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
diskette in the system’s diskette drive. The JumpStart program matches rule 2 to the
system. rule 2 specifies that the JumpStart program use Pete’s profile to install
the Solaris software. The JumpStart program reads Pete’s profile and installs the
Solaris software, based on the instructions that the system administrator specified in
Pete’s profile.

Pete's System

JumpStart Directory

Engineering
rule 1 Group’s
Profile
rule 2

rule 3

rules.ok File
Marketing
Group’s
Profile

Pete’s
Profile

FIGURE 3–1 How a Custom JumpStart Installation Works: nonnetworked Example

Chapter 3 • Custom JumpStart (Overview) 41

 Figure 3–2 illustrates how a custom JumpStart installation works with more than one
system on a network. Previously, the system administrator set up different profiles and
saved the profiles on a single server. The system administrator initiates the custom
JumpStart installation on one of the engineering systems. The JumpStart program
accesses the rules files in the JumpStart/ directory on the server. The JumpStart
program matches the engineering system to rule 1. rule 1 specifies that the
JumpStart program use Engineering Group’s Profile to install the Solaris
software. The JumpStart program reads Engineering Group’s Profile and
installs the Solaris software, based on the instructions that the system administrator
specified in Engineering Group’s Profile.

Engineering’s Systems

JumpStart Directory

Engineering
rule 1 Group’s Marketing’s Systems
Profile
rule 2

rule 3
rules.ok
File Marketing
Group’s
Profile

Pete’s Pete’s System

Profile

FIGURE 3–2 How a Custom JumpStart Installation Works: Networked Example

Figure 3–3 describes the order in which the JumpStart program searches for custom
JumpStart files.

42 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 BEGIN

Does the system

find a diskette in Yes Does the system
The system mounts
the system’s find a rules.ok
the diskette.
diskette drive? file on the diskette?
No No Yes

Does the system Does the system

find a rules.ok Yes match any rules
file on a designated in the rules.ok
server? file?
No No Yes

END END
The system proceeds The system proceeds with a
with an alternate custom JumpStart installation.
installation program. The profile specified in the
matched rule is used to install
the system.

FIGURE 3–3 What Happens During a Custom JumpStart Installation

Chapter 3 • Custom JumpStart (Overview) 43

44 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
CHAPTER 4

Preparing Custom JumpStart

Installations (Tasks)

This chapter provides step-by-step instructions about how to prepare the systems at
your site from which and on which you intend to install the Solaris software by using
the custom JumpStart installation method.
■ “Task Map: Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations” on page 45
■ “Creating a Profile Server for Networked Systems” on page 47
■ “Creating a Profile Diskette for Standalone Systems” on page 51
■ “Creating the rules File” on page 56
■ “Creating a Profile” on page 59
■ “Testing a Profile” on page 70
■ “Validating the rules File” on page 75

Task Map: Preparing Custom JumpStart

Installations
TABLE 4–1 Task Map: Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations

Task Description For Instructions

Decide how to upgrade the system if If a previous release of Solaris is “Upgrade” on page 29
a previous version of the Solaris installed on the system, you need to
software is installed on the system. determine how to upgrade the
system. Ensure that you know what
to do before and after you upgrade a
system. Planning helps you to create
your profiles, begin scripts, and
finish scripts.

45
TABLE 4–1 Task Map: Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations (Continued)
Task Description For Instructions

Create a JumpStart directory. On a server “Creating a Profile Server for

Networked Systems” on page 47
If you want to perform custom
JumpStart installations on systems
that are connected to a network, you
must create a profile server. The
profile server contains a JumpStart
directory for the custom JumpStart
files.

On a diskette “Creating a Profile Diskette for

Standalone Systems” on page 51
If you want to perform custom
JumpStart installations on systems
that are not connected to a network,
you must create a profile diskette. A
profile diskette contains the custom
JumpStart files.

Add rules to the rules file. After you decide how you want “Creating the rules File” on page
each group of systems or single 56
systems to be installed, create a rule
for each group that you want to
install. Each rule distinguishes a
group, based on one or more system
attributes. The rule links each group
to a profile.

Create a profile for every rule. A profile is a text file that defines “Creating a Profile” on page 59
how to install the Solaris software,
for example, which software group
to install on a system. Every rule
specifies a profile to define how a
system is to be installed with the
Solaris software when the rule is
matched. You usually create a
different profile for every rule.
However, the same profile can be
used in more than one rule.

(Optional) Test the profiles. After you create a profile, use the “Testing a Profile” on page 70
pfinstall(1M) command to test
the profile before you use the profile
to install or upgrade a system.

46 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
TABLE 4–1 Task Map: Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations (Continued)
Task Description For Instructions

Validate the rules file. The rules.ok file is a generated “Validating the rules File”
version of the rules file that the on page 75
JumpStart program uses to match
the system to be installed with a
profile. You must use the check
script to validate the rules file.

Creating a Profile Server for Networked

Systems
When setting up custom JumpStart installations for systems on the network, you need
to create a directory on a server that is called a JumpStart directory. The JumpStart
directory contains all of the essential custom JumpStart files, for example, the rules
file, rules.ok file, and profiles. You must save the JumpStart directory in the root (/)
directory of the profile server.

The server that contains a JumpStart directory is called a profile server. A profile
server can be the same system as an install server or a boot server, or the server can be
a completely different server. A profile server can provide custom JumpStart files for
different platforms. For example, an x86 server can provide custom JumpStart files for
both SPARC based systems and x86 based systems.

Note – After you create a profile server, you must allow systems to access the server.
For detailed instructions, see “To Allow All Systems Access to the Profile Server”
on page 49.

▼ To Create a JumpStart Directory on a Server

Note – This procedure assumes that the system is running Volume Manager. If you are
not using Volume Manager to manage discs, refer to System Administration Guide:
Devices and File Systems for detailed information about managing removable media
without Volume Manager.

Steps 1. Log in as superuser on the server on which you want to create the JumpStart
directory.

Chapter 4 • Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations (Tasks) 47

 2. Create the JumpStart directory anywhere on the server.
# mkdir -m 755 jumpstart_dir_path
In the command, jumpstart_dir_path is the absolute path of the JumpStart directory.
For example, the following command creates a directory that is called jumpstart
in the root (/) directory and sets the permissions to 755:
# mkdir -m 755 /jumpstart

3. Edit the /etc/dfs/dfstab file by adding the following entry.

share -F nfs -o ro,anon=0 jumpstart_dir_path
For example, the following entry shares the /jumpstart directory:
share -F nfs -o ro,anon=0 /jumpstart

4. Type shareall and press Enter.

5. Determine if you want to copy examples of custom JumpStart files to your

JumpStart directory.
■ If no, go to Step 8.
■ If yes, use the following decision table to determine what to do next.

Example Locations Instructions

The Solaris 10 Operating Insert the Solaris 10 Operating System DVD or the Solaris
System DVD or the Solaris 10 10 Software - 1 CD into the server’s CD-ROM drive.
Software - 1 CD for your
Volume Manager automatically mounts the CD.
platform

An image of the Solaris 10 Change directory to the location of the Solaris 10 Operating
Operating System DVD or System DVD or the Solaris 10 Software - 1 image. For
the Solaris 10 Software - 1 CD example, type the following command:
for your platform on a local
cd /export/install
disk

6. Copy the example custom JumpStart files into the JumpStart directory on the
profile server.
# cp -r media_path/Solaris_10/Misc/jumpstart_sample/* jumpstart_dir_path

media_path The path to the CD, DVD, or image on the local disk
jumpstart_dir_path The path on the profile server where you are placing the
example custom JumpStart files
For example, the following command copies the jumpstart_sample directory
into the /jumpstart directory on the profile server:
■ For SPARC based systems:
cp -r /cdrom/cdrom0/s0/Solaris_10/Misc/jumpstart_sample/* /jumpstart

48 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 ■ For x86 based systems:
cp -r /cdrom/cdrom0/s2/Solaris_10/Misc/jumpstart_sample/* /jumpstart

cp -r /cdrom/cdrom0/s0/Solaris_10/Misc/jumpstart_sample/* /jumpstart

7. Update the example JumpStart files so that the files work in your environment.

8. Ensure that root owns the JumpStart directory and that the permissions are set
to 755.

9. Allow systems on the network to access the profile server.

For detailed instructions, see “To Allow All Systems Access to the Profile Server”
on page 49.

▼ To Allow All Systems Access to the Profile Server

When you create a profile server, you must ensure that systems can access the
JumpStart directory on the profile server during a custom JumpStart installation. Use
one of the following ways to ensure access:
■ add_install_client command – Each time that you add a system for network
installation, use the -c option with the add_install_client command. For
detailed instructions, refer to “Adding Systems to Be Installed From the Network
With a CD Image” in Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations.
■ boot command – Specify the location of the JumpStart directory on the profile
server when you boot the system. You must compress the custom JumpStart
configuration files into one file. Then, save the compressed configuration file on an
NFS server, an HTTP server, or on media that the system can access locally. For
detailed instructions, refer to “Creating a Compressed Configuration File” on page
85.
When you boot the system to initiate the custom JumpStart installation, specify the
location of the compressed file.
■ For detailed instructions for SPARC based systems, refer to Step 5 in “SPARC:
To Perform an Installation or Upgrade With the Custom JumpStart Program”
on page 103.
■ For x86 based systems, refer to Step 8 in “x86: To Perform an Installation or
Upgrade With the Custom JumpStart Program” on page 106.
■ /etc/bootparams file – Use a wildcard in the /etc/bootparams file. Use the
following steps to add a wildcard in the etc/bootparams file.

Note – The following procedure is not necessary if you save the JumpStart directory on
a diskette or if you specify the location of the profile server when you boot the system.

Chapter 4 • Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations (Tasks) 49

 The following procedure is valid only if you store network installation information in
the /etc/bootparams file. You can also store network installation information in one
of the following places:
■ Name service database – If you store network installation information in the name
service bootparams database, you must update the bootparams database with
the entry that is shown in Step 3.
■ DHCP server – If you store network installation information on a DHCP server, use
the boot command to specify that the custom JumpStart program use the DHCP
server.
■ For detailed instructions for SPARC based systems, refer to Step 5 in “SPARC:
To Perform an Installation or Upgrade With the Custom JumpStart Program”
on page 103.
■ For x86 based systems, refer to Step 8 in “x86: To Perform an Installation or
Upgrade With the Custom JumpStart Program” on page 106

Steps 1. On the install or boot server, log in as superuser.

2. Use a text editor to open /etc/bootparams.

3. Add this entry.

* install_config=server:jumpstart_dir_path

* A wildcard character that specifies that all systems have

access
server The host name of the profile server where the JumpStart
directory is located
jumpstart_dir_path The absolute path of the JumpStart directory
For example, the following entry allows all systems to access the /jumpstart
directory on the profile server that is named sherlock:
* install_config=sherlock:/jumpstart

Caution – Use of this procedure might produce the following error message when
an install client is booted:

WARNING: getfile: RPC failed: error 5: (RPC Timed out).

“Booting From the Network, Error Messages” on page 193 contains details about
this error message.

All systems can now access the profile server.

50 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 Creating a Profile Diskette for
Standalone Systems
A diskette that contains a JumpStart directory is called a profile diskette. A system that
is not connected to the network does not have access to a profile server. As a result,
you must create a JumpStart directory on a diskette if a system is not connected to a
network. The system on which you create a profile diskette must have a diskette drive.

The JumpStart directory contains all of the essential custom JumpStart files, for
example, the rules file, rules.ok file, and profiles. You must save the JumpStart
directory in the root (/) directory of the profile diskette.

▼ SPARC: To Create a Profile Diskette

Note – This procedure assumes that the system is running Volume Manager. If you are
not using Volume Manager to manage diskettes, CDs, and DVDs, refer to System
Administration Guide: Devices and File Systems for detailed information about managing
removable media without Volume Manager.

Steps 1. Log in as superuser on a SPARC based system to which a diskette drive is

attached.

2. Insert a blank diskette or a diskette that can be overwritten in the diskette drive.

3. Mount the diskette.

# volcheck

4. Determine if the diskette contains a UNIX file system (UFS).

Examine the contents of the file /etc/mnttab on the system for an entry such as
the following:
/vol/dev/diskette0/scrap /floppy/scrap ufs suid,rw,largefiles,dev=1740008 927147040

■ If the entry exists, go to Step 7.

■ If the entry does not exist, go to the next step.

5. Format the diskette.

Chapter 4 • Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations (Tasks) 51

 Caution – Formatting erases all data on the diskette.

# fdformat -U

6. Create a UFS on the diskette.

# newfs /vol/dev/aliases/floppy0

7. Determine if you want to copy examples of custom JumpStart files to your

JumpStart directory.
■ If no, go to Step 10.
■ If yes, use the following decision table to determine what to do next.

Example Locations Instructions

The Solaris 10 Operating Insert the Solaris 10 Operating System for SPARC Platforms
System for SPARC Platforms DVD or the Solaris 10 Software for SPARC Platforms - 1 CD
DVD or the Solaris 10 into the server’s CD-ROM drive.
Software for SPARC
Volume Manager automatically mounts the CD.
Platforms - 1 CD

An image of the Solaris 10 Change the directory to the location of the Solaris 10
Operating System for SPARC Operating System for SPARC Platforms DVD or the Solaris
Platforms DVD or the Solaris 10 Software for SPARC Platforms - 1 CD image. For
10 Software for SPARC example, type the following command:
Platforms - 1 CD on a local
cd /export/install
disk

8. Copy the example custom JumpStart files into the JumpStart directory on the
profile diskette.
# cp -r media_path/Solaris_10/Misc/jumpstart_sample/* jumpstart_dir_path

media_path The path to the CD, DVD, or image on the local disk
jumpstart_dir_path The path to the profile diskette where you want to place the
example custom JumpStart files

Note – You must place all custom JumpStart installation files in the root (/)
directory on the diskette.

52 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 For example, the following command copies the contents of jumpstart_sample
on the Solaris 10 Software for SPARC Platforms - 1 CD to the root (/) directory on a
profile diskette that is named scrap:
cp -r /cdrom/sol_10_sparc/s0/Solaris_10/Misc/jumpstart_sample/* /floppy/scrap

9. Update the example JumpStart files on the profile diskette so that the files work
in your environment.

10. Ensure that root owns the JumpStart directory and that permissions are set to
755.

11. Eject the diskette.

# eject floppy
You have completed the creation of a profile diskette. You can now update the
rules file and create profiles on the profile diskette to perform custom JumpStart
installations. To continue, go to “Creating the rules File” on page 56.

▼ x86: To Create a Profile Diskette

Note – This procedure assumes that the system is running Volume Manager. If you are
not using Volume Manager to manage diskettes, CDs, and DVDs, refer to System
Administration Guide: Devices and File Systems for detailed information about managing
removable media without Volume Manager.

Steps 1. Log in as superuser on an x86 based system to which a diskette drive is attached.

2. Insert the Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant diskette into the diskette
drive (usually drive A). You use this diskette as the profile diskette.

x86 only – You can copy the Device Configuration Assistant software to a diskette
from the Solaris 10 Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD or Solaris 10 Software
for x86 Platforms - 2 CD by using the procedure in Appendix C, “Preparing to Boot
From the Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant or the Network (Tasks),” in
Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations.

3. Mount the diskette.

# volcheck

Chapter 4 • Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations (Tasks) 53

 4. Copy the image of the Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant to the system’s
hard disk.
# dd if=/vol/dev/aliases/floppy0 of=boot_image
In the command, boot_image is the name of the file into which you want to copy the
image of the Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant. You can specify an absolute
path name.
For example, the following command copies the boot diskette to a file that is
named boot_save:
dd if=/vol/dev/aliases/floppy0 of=boot_save

5. Eject the diskette by clicking Eject Disk in the File Manager window or by
typing eject floppy on the command line.

6. In the Removable Media Manager dialog box, click OK.

7. Manually eject the Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant diskette.

8. Insert a blank diskette or a diskette that can be overwritten into the diskette
drive.

9. Mount the diskette.

# volcheck

10. Format the diskette.

Caution – Formatting erases all data on the diskette.

# fdformat -d -U

11. Copy the Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant image from the system’s
hard disk to the formatted diskette.
# dd if=boot_image of=/vol/dev/aliases/floppy0
In the command, boot_image is the name of the file where you want to copy the
image of the Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant. You can specify an absolute
path name.

12. Determine if you want to copy examples of custom JumpStart files to your
JumpStart directory.
■ If no, go to Step 15.
■ If yes, use the following decision table to determine what to do next.

54 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 Example Locations Instructions

The Solaris 10 Operating Insert the Solaris 10 Operating System for x86 Platforms
System for x86 Platforms DVD or the Solaris 10 Software for x86 Platforms - 1 CD
DVD or the Solaris 10 into the server’s CD-ROM drive.
Software for x86 Platforms - 1
Volume Manager automatically mounts the CD.
CD

An image of the Solaris 10 Change directory to the location of the Solaris 10 Operating
Operating System for x86 System for x86 Platforms DVD or the Solaris 10 Software
Platforms DVD or the Solaris for x86 Platforms - 1 CD image. For example, type the
10 Software for x86 Platforms following:
- 1 CD on a local disk
cd /export/install

13. Copy the example custom JumpStart files into the JumpStart directory on the
profile diskette.
# cp -r media_path/Solaris_10/Misc/jumpstart_sample/* jumpstart_dir_path

media_path The path to the CD, DVD, or image on the local disk
jumpstart_dir_path The path to the profile diskette where you want to place the
example custom JumpStart files

Note – You must place all custom JumpStart installation files in the root (/)
directory on the profile diskette.

For example, the following command copies the contents of jumpstart_sample

on the Solaris 10 Software for x86 Platforms - 1 CD to the root (/) directory on a
profile diskette that is named scrap:
cp -r /cdrom/sol_10_x86/s2/Solaris_10/Misc/jumpstart_sample/* /floppy/scrap

14. Update the example JumpStart files on the profile diskette so that the files work
in your environment.

15. Ensure that root owns the JumpStart directory and that permissions are set to
755.

16. Eject the diskette by clicking Eject Disk in the File Manager window or by
typing eject floppy on the command line.

17. In the Removable Media Manager dialog box, click OK.

18. Manually eject the diskette.

Chapter 4 • Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations (Tasks) 55

 See Also You have completed the creation of a profile diskette. Now you can update the rules
file and create profiles on the profile diskette to perform custom JumpStart
installations. To continue, go to “Creating the rules File” on page 56.

Creating the rules File

The rules file is a text file that contains a rule for each group of systems on which
you want to install the Solaris OS. Each rule distinguishes a group of systems that are
based on one or more system attributes. Each rule also links each group to a profile. A
profile is a text file that defines how the Solaris software is to be installed on each
system in the group. For example, the following rule specifies that the JumpStart
program use the information in the basic_prof profile to install any system with the
sun4u platform group.
karch sun4u - basic_prof -

The rules file is used to create the rules.ok file, which is required for custom
JumpStart installations.

Note – If you set up the JumpStart directory by using the procedures in “Creating a
Profile Diskette for Standalone Systems” on page 51 or “Creating a Profile Server for
Networked Systems” on page 47, an example rules file is already located in the
JumpStart directory. The sample rules file contains documentation and some
example rules. If you use the sample rules file, ensure that you comment out the
example rules you do not intend to use.

Syntax of the rules File

The rules file must have the following attributes:
■ The file must be assigned the name rules.
■ The file must contain at least one rule.

The rules file can contain any of the following:

■ Commented text
Any text that is included after the # symbol on a line is treated by JumpStart as
commented text. If a line begins with the # symbol, the entire line is treated as a
comment.
■ One or more blank lines

56 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 ■ One or more multiline rules
To continue a single rule onto a new line, include a backslash character (\) just
before pressing Return.

▼ To Create a rules File

Steps 1. Use a text editor to create a text file that is named rules. Or, open the sample
rules file in the JumpStart directory that you created.

2. Add a rule in the rules file for each group of systems on which you want to
install the Solaris software.
For a list of rules file keywords and values, see “Rule Keywords and Values”
on page 121.
A rule within a rules file must adhere to the following syntax:
!rule_keyword rule_value && !rule_keyword rule_value ... begin profile finish

! A symbol that is used before a keyword to indicate negation.

rule_keyword A predefined lexical unit or word that describes a general system
attribute, such as host name, hostname, or memory size,
memsize. rule_keyword is used with the rule value to match a
system with the same attribute to a profile. For the list of rule
keywords, see “Rule Keywords and Values” on page 121.
rule_value A value that provides the specific system attribute for the
corresponding rule keyword. Rule values are described in “Rule
Keywords and Values” on page 121.
&& A symbol you must use to join rule keyword and rule value pairs
in the same rule (a logical AND). During a custom JumpStart
installation, a system must match every pair in the rule before the
rule matches.
begin The name of an optional Bourne shell script that can be executed
before the installation begins. If no begin script exists, you must
type a minus sign (-) in this field. All begin scripts must be located
in the JumpStart directory.

Information about how to create begin scripts is presented in

“Creating Begin Scripts” on page 77.
profile The name of a text file that defines how the Solaris software is to
be installed on the system when a system matches the rule. The
information in a profile consists of profile keywords and their
corresponding profile values. All profiles must be located in the
JumpStart directory.

Chapter 4 • Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations (Tasks) 57

 Note – Optional ways to use the profile field are described in
“Using a Site-Specific Installation Program” on page 92 and
“Creating Derived Profiles With a Begin Script” on page 78.

finish The name of an optional Bourne shell script that can be executed
after the installation is completed. If no finish script exists, you
must type a minus sign (-) in this field. All finish scripts must be
located in the JumpStart directory.

Information about how to create finish scripts is presented in

“Creating Finish Scripts” on page 79.
At the minimum, each rule must contain the following:
■ A keyword, a value, and a corresponding profile
■ A minus sign (-) in the begin and finish fields if no begin or finish scripts are
specified

3. Save the rules file in the JumpStart directory.

4. Ensure that root owns the rules file and that the permissions are set to 644.

rules File Example

The following example shows several example rules in a rules file. Each line has a
rule keyword and a valid value for that keyword. The JumpStart program scans the
rules file from top to bottom.

When the JumpStart program matches a rule keyword and value with a known
system, the JumpStart program installs the Solaris software that is specified by the
profile that is listed in the profile field.

EXAMPLE 4–1 rule File

# rule keywords and rule values begin script profile finish script
# ----------------------------- ------------ -------- -------------
hostname eng-1 - basic_prof -
network 192.168.255.255 && !model \
’SUNW,Sun-Blade-100’ - net_prof -
model SUNW,SPARCstation-LX - lx_prof complete
network 192.168.2.0 && karch i86pc setup x86_prof done
memsize 64-128 && arch i386 - prog_prof -
any - - generic_prof -

The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this example.

58 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
EXAMPLE 4–1 rule File (Continued)

hostname The rule matches if the system’s host name is eng-1. The basic_prof
profile is used to install the Solaris software on the system that matches
the rule.
network The rule matches if the system is on subnet 192.168.255.255 and if the
system is not a SPARCstation™ 20 (SUNW,SPARCstation-20). The
net_prof profile is used to install the Solaris software on systems that
match this rule. The rule also provides an example of rule wrap, which
is defined in “Syntax of the rules File” on page 56.
model The rule matches if the system is a SPARCstation LX. The lx_prof
profile and the complete finish script are used to install the Solaris
software on systems that match this rule.
network The rule matches if the system is on subnet 193.168.2.0 and is an x86
based sun4u system. The setup begin script, the x864u_prof profile,
and the done finish script are used to install the Solaris software on
systems that match the rule.
memsize The rule matches if the system has between 64 and 128 Mbytes of
memory and is an x86 based system. The prog_prof profile is used to
install the Solaris software on systems that match the rule.
any The rule matches any system that did not match the previous rules. The
generic_prof profile is used to install the Solaris software on
systems that match the rule. If any is used, it should always be the last
rule in the rules file.

Creating a Profile
A profile is a text file that defines how to install the Solaris software on a system. A
profile defines elements of the installation, for example, the software group to install.
Every rule specifies a profile that defines how a system is to be installed. You can
create different profiles for every rule or the same profile can be used in more than one
rule.

A profile consists of one or more profile keywords and their values. Each profile
keyword is a command that controls one aspect of how the JumpStart program is to
install the Solaris software on a system. For example, the following profile keyword
and value specify that the JumpStart program install the system as a server:
system_type server

Chapter 4 • Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations (Tasks) 59

 Note – Sample profiles are already located in the JumpStart directory if you created the
JumpStart directory by using either of these procedures:
■ “Creating a Profile Server for Networked Systems” on page 47
■ “Creating a Profile Diskette for Standalone Systems” on page 51

Syntax of Profiles
A profile must contain the following:
■ The install_type profile keyword as the first entry
■ One keyword per line
■ The root_device keyword if the systems that are being upgraded by the profile
contain more than one root (/) file system that can be upgraded

A profile can contain the following:

■ Commented text
Any text that is included after the # symbol on a line is treated by the JumpStart
program as commented text. If a line begins with the # symbol, the entire line is
treated as a comment.
■ One or more blank lines

▼ To Create a Profile
Steps 1. Use a text editor to create a text file. Name the file descriptively. Or, open a
sample profile in the JumpStart directory that you created.

Note – Ensure that the name of the profile reflects how you intend to use the profile
to install the Solaris software on a system. For example, you might name the
profiles basic_install, eng_profile, or user_profile.

2. Add profile keywords and values to the profile.

For a list of profile keywords and values, see “Profile Keywords and Values”
on page 125.

60 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 Note – Profile keywords and their values are case sensitive.

3. Save the profile in the JumpStart directory.

4. Ensure that root owns the profile and that the permissions are set to 644.

5. Test the profile (optional).

“Testing a Profile” on page 70 contains information about testing profiles.

Profile Examples
The following examples of profiles show how to use different profile keywords and
profile values to control how the Solaris software is installed on a system. “Profile
Keywords and Values” on page 125 contains a description of profile keywords and
values.

EXAMPLE 4–2 Mounting Remote File Systems and Adding and Deleting Packages

# profile keywords profile values

# ----------------- -----------------
install_type initial_install
system_type standalone
partitioning default
filesys any 512 swap # specify size of /swap
cluster SUNWCprog
package SUNWman delete
cluster SUNWCacc

The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this example.
install_type The install_type keyword is required in every profile.
system_type The system_type keyword defines that the system is to be
installed as a standalone system.
partitioning The file system slices are determined by the software to be
installed with the value default. The size of swap is set to 512
Mbytes and is installed on any disk, value any.
cluster The Developer Solaris Software Group, SUNWCprog, is installed
on the system.
package If the standard man pages are mounted from the file server,
s_ref, on the network, the man page packages are not to be
installed on the system. The packages that contain the System
Accounting utilities are selected to be installed on the system.

Chapter 4 • Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations (Tasks) 61

 EXAMPLE 4–3 Mounting Remote File Systems and Adding a Third-Party Package

# profile keywords profile values

# ----------------- -----------------
install_type initial_install
system_type standalone
partitioning default
filesys any 512 swap # specify size of /swap
cluster SUNWCprog
cluster SUNWCacc
package apache_server \
http://package.central/packages/apache timeout 5

The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this example.
install_type The install_type keyword is required in every profile.
system_type The system_type keyword defines that the system is to be
installed as a standalone system.
partitioning The file system slices are determined by the software to be
installed with the value default. The size of swap is set to 512
Mbytes and is installed on any disk, value any.
cluster The Developer Solaris Software Group, SUNWCprog, is installed
on the system.
package A third-party package is installed on the system located on an
HTTP server.

EXAMPLE 4–4 Specifying Where to Install File Systems

# profile keywords profile values
# ---------------- -------------------
install_type initial_install
system_type standalone
partitioning explicit
filesys c0t0d0s0 auto /
filesys c0t3d0s1 auto swap
filesys any auto usr
cluster SUNWCall

The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this example.
partitioning The file system slices are determined by the filesys keywords,
value explicit. The size of root (/) is based on the selected
software, value auto, and is installed on c0t0d0s0. The size of
swap is set to the necessary size and is installed on c0t3d0s1.
usr is based on the selected software and the installation program
determines where usr is installed, based on the value any.
cluster The Entire Solaris Software Group, SUNWCall, is installed on the
system.

62 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
EXAMPLE 4–5 Upgrading and Installing Patches
# profile keywords profile values
# ---------------- -------------------
install_type upgrade
root_device c0t3d0s2
backup_media remote_filesystem timber:/export/scratch
package SUNWbcp delete
package SUNWxwman add
cluster SUNWCacc add
patch patch_list nfs://patch_master/Solaris_10/patches\
retry 5
locale de

The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this example.
install_type The profile upgrades a system by reallocating disk space. In this
example, disk space must be reallocated because some file systems
on the system did not have enough space for the upgrade.
root_device The root file system on c0t3d0s2 is upgraded.
backup_media A remote system that is named timber is to be used to back up
data during the disk space reallocation. For more backup-media
keyword values, see “backup_media Profile Keyword” on page
132.
package The binary compatibility package, SUNWbcp, is not installed on
the system after the upgrade.
package The code ensures that the X Window System man pages and the
System Accounting Utilities are to be installed if they are not
already installed on the system. All packages already on the
system are automatically upgraded.
patch A list of patches that are installed with the upgrade. The patch list
is located on an NFS server named patch_master under the
directories Solaris_10/patches. In case of a mount failure, the
NFS mount is tried five times.
locale The German localization packages are to be installed on the
system.

EXAMPLE 4–6 Reallocating Disk Space for an Upgrade

# profile keywords profile values
# ---------------- -------------------
install_type upgrade
root_device c0t3d0s2
backup_media remote_filesystem timber:/export/scratch
layout_constraint c0t3d0s2 changeable 100
layout_constraint c0t3d0s4 changeable
layout_constraint c0t3d0s5 movable
package SUNWbcp delete

Chapter 4 • Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations (Tasks) 63

 EXAMPLE 4–6 Reallocating Disk Space for an Upgrade (Continued)

package SUNWxwman add

cluster SUNWCacc add
locale de

The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this example.
install_type The profile upgrades a system by reallocating disk space. In
this example, disk space must be reallocated because some
file systems on the system did not have enough space for
the upgrade.
root_device The root file system on c0t3d0s2 is upgraded.
backup_media A remote system that is named timber is to be used to
back up data during the disk space reallocation. For more
backup-media keyword values, see “backup_media
Profile Keyword” on page 132.
layout_constraint The layout_constraint keywords designate that
auto-layout can perform the following when auto-layout
attempts to reallocate disk space for the upgrade.
■ Change slices 2 and 4. The slices can be moved to
another location and the size can be changed.
■ Move slice 5. The slice can be moved to another location
but its size cannot change.
package The binary compatibility package, SUNWbcp, is not
installed on the system after the upgrade.
package The code ensures that the X Window System man pages
and the System Accounting Utilities are to be installed if
they are not already installed on the system. All packages
already on the system are automatically upgraded.
locale The German localization packages are to be installed on the
system.

EXAMPLE 4–7 Retrieving a Solaris Flash Archive From an HTTP Server

In the following example, the profile indicates that the custom JumpStart program
retrieves the Solaris Flash archive from an HTTP server.
# profile keywords profile values
# ---------------- -------------------
install_type flash_install
archive_location http://192.168.255.255/flasharchive/solarisarchive
partitioning explicit
filesys c0t1d0s0 4000 /
filesys c0t1d0s1 512 swap

64 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 EXAMPLE 4–7 Retrieving a Solaris Flash Archive From an HTTP Server (Continued)

filesys c0t1d0s7 free /export/home

The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this example.
install_type The profile installs a Solaris Flash archive on the clone
system. All files are overwritten as in an initial installation.
archive_location The Solaris Flash archive is retrieved from an HTTP server.
partitioning The file system slices are determined by the filesys
keywords, value explicit. The size of root (/) is based on
the size of the Solaris Flash archive. The root file system is
installed on c0t1d0s0. The size of swap is set to the
necessary size and is installed on c0t1d0s1.
/export/home is based on the remaining disk space.
/export/home is installed on c0t1d0s7.

EXAMPLE 4–8 Retrieving a Solaris Flash Archive From a Secure HTTP Server

In the following example, the profile indicates that the custom JumpStart program
retrieves the Solaris Flash archive from a secure HTTP server.
# profile keywords profile values
# ---------------- -------------------
install_type flash_install
archive_location https://192.168.255.255/solarisupdate.flar
partitioning explicit
filesys c0t1d0s0 4000 /
filesys c0t1d0s1 512 swap
filesys c0t1d0s7 free /export/home

The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this example.
install_type The profile installs a Solaris Flash archive on the clone
system. All files are overwritten as in an initial installation.
archive_location The compressed Solaris Flash archive is retrieved from a
secure HTTP server.
partitioning The file system slices are determined by the filesys
keywords, value explicit. The size of root (/) is based on
the size of the Solaris Flash archive. The size of swap is set to
the necessary size and is installed on c0t1d0s1.
/export/home is based on the remaining disk space.
/export/home is installed on c0t1d0s7.

Chapter 4 • Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations (Tasks) 65

 EXAMPLE 4–9 Retrieving a Solaris Flash Archive and Installing a Third-Party Package

In the following example, the profile indicates that the custom JumpStart program
retrieves the Solaris Flash archive from an HTTP server.
# profile keywords profile values
# ---------------- -------------------
install_type flash_install
archive_location http://192.168.255.255/flasharchive/solarisarchive
partitioning explicit
filesys c0t1d0s0 4000 /
filesys c0t1d0s1 512 swap
filesys c0t1d0s7 free /export/home
package SUNWnew http://192.168.254.255/Solaris_10 timeout 5

The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this example.
install_type The profile installs a Solaris Flash archive on the clone
system. All files are overwritten as in an initial installation.
archive_location The Solaris Flash archive is retrieved from an HTTP server.
partitioning The file system slices are determined by the filesys
keywords, value explicit. The size of root (/) is based on
the size of the Solaris Flash archive. The root file system is
installed on c0t1d0s0. The size of swap is set to the
necessary size and is installed on c0t1d0s1.
/export/home is based on the remaining disk space.
/export/home is installed on c0t1d0s7.
package The SUNWnew package is added from the Solaris_10
directory from the HTTP server 192.168.254.255.

EXAMPLE 4–10 Retrieving a Solaris Flash Differential Archive From an NFS Server

In the following example, the profile indicates that the custom JumpStart program
retrieves the Solaris Flash archive from an NFS server. The flash_update keyword
indicates that this is a differential archive. A differential archive installs only the
differences between two system images.
# profile keywords profile values
# ---------------- -------------------
install_type flash_update
archive_location nfs installserver:/export/solaris/flasharchive \
/solarisdiffarchive
no_master_check

The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this example.
install_type The profile installs a Solaris Flash differential archive on the
clone system. Only files that are specified by the archive are
installed.

66 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
EXAMPLE 4–10 Retrieving a Solaris Flash Differential Archive From an NFS Server
(Continued)

archive_location The Solaris Flash archive is retrieved from an NFS server.

no_master_check The clone system is not checked for a valid system image. A
valid system image would have been built from the original
master system.

EXAMPLE 4–11 Creating an Empty Boot Environment

In the following example, the profile indicates that the custom JumpStart program
creates an empty boot environment. An empty boot environment contains no file
systems and no copy from the current boot environment occurs. The boot environment
can be populated later with a Solaris Flash archive and then activated.
# profile keywords profile values
# ---------------- -------------------
install_type initial_install
system_type standalone
partitioning explicit
filesys c0t0d0s0 auto /
filesys c0t3d0s1 auto swap
filesys any auto usr
cluster SUNWCall
bootenv createbe bename second_BE \
filesystem /:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:ufs \
filesystem -:/dev/dsk/c0t1d0s0:swap \
filesystem /export:shared:ufs

The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this example.
partitioning The file system slices are determined by the filesys
keywords, value explicit. The size of root (/) is based on
the selected software, value auto, and is installed on
c0t0d0s0. The size of swap is set to the necessary size and
is installed on c0t3d0s1. usr is based on the selected
software and the installation program determines where usr
is installed, based on the value any.
cluster The Entire Solaris Software Group, SUNWCall, is installed on
the system.
bootenv createbe An empty, inactive boot environment is set up on disk
c0t1d0. File systems for root (/), swap, and /export are
created, but left empty. This second boot environment can be
installed with a Solaris Flash archive at a later time. The new
boot environment can then be activated to become the
current boot environment.

Chapter 4 • Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations (Tasks) 67

 EXAMPLE 4–11 Creating an Empty Boot Environment (Continued)

For keyword values and background about using this

keyword, see the following references:
■ For descriptions of keyword values, see “Profile
Keywords and Values” on page 125.
■ For background about using Solaris Live Upgrade that
creates, upgrades, and activates inactive boot
environments, see Chapter 4, “Solaris Live Upgrade
(Overview),” in Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Solaris Live
Upgrade and Upgrade Planning.
■ For background about using a Solaris Flash archive, see
Chapter 1, “Solaris Flash (Overview),” in Solaris 10
Installation Guide: Solaris Flash Archives (Creation and
Installation).

EXAMPLE 4–12 Creating a RAID-1 Volume to Mirror the Root File System

In the following example, the profile indicates that the custom JumpStart program
uses Solaris Volume Manager technology to create a RAID-1 volume (mirror) for the
root (/) file system.
# profile keywords profile values
# ---------------- -------------------
install_type initial_install
cluster SUNWCXall
filesys mirror:d30 c0t1d0s0 c0t0d0s0 /
filesys c0t0d0s3 512 swap
metadb c0t0d0s4 size 8192 count 4
metadb c0t1d0s4 size 8192 count 4

The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this example.
cluster The Entire Solaris Software Plus OEM Support software group,
SUNWCXall, is installed on the system.
filesys The root (/) file system is created and mirrored on the slices c0t1d0s0
and c0t0d0s0. The RAID-1 volume that mirrors c0t1d0s0 and
c0t0d0s0 is named d30. The custom JumpStart program assigns names
to the two submirrors.
filesys The swap file system is created and mirrored on the slice c0t0d0s3, and
is sized at 512 Mbytes.
metadb Four state database replicas (metadbs) are installed on slice c0t0d0s4,
and are sized at 8192 blocks (4 Mbytes).
metadb Four state database replicas (metadbs) are installed on slice c0t1d0s4,
and are sized at 8192 blocks (4 Mbytes).

68 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
EXAMPLE 4–12 Creating a RAID-1 Volume to Mirror the Root File System (Continued)

■ For overview information about how to create RAID-1 volumes during your
installation, see Chapter 10.
■ For guidelines and requirements about creating RAID-1 volumes, see Chapter 11.
■ For descriptions of keyword values, see “filesys Profile Keyword (Creating
RAID-1 Volumes)” on page 144 and “metadb Profile Keyword (Creating State
Database Replicas)” on page 150.

EXAMPLE 4–13 Creating RAID-1 Volumes to Mirror Multiple File Systems

In the following example, the profile indicates that the custom JumpStart program
uses Solaris Volume Manager technology to create RAID-1 volumes (mirrors) for the
root (/), swap, and /usr file systems.
# profile keywords profile values
# ---------------- -------------------
install_type initial_install
cluster SUNWCXall
filesys mirror:d100 c0t1d0s0 c0t0d0s0 200 /
filesys c0t1d0s5 500 /var
filesys c0t0d0s5 500
filesys mirror c0t0d0s1 512 swap
metadb c0t0d0s3 size 8192 count 5
filesys mirror c0t1d0s4 c0t0d0s4 2000 /usr
filesys c0t1d0s7 free /export/home
filesys c0t0d0s7 free

The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this example.
cluster The Entire Solaris Software Plus OEM Support software group,
SUNWCXall, is installed on the system.
filesys The root (/) file system is created and mirrored on the slices c0t1d0s0
and c0t0d0s0. The size of the root (/) file system is set to 200 Mbytes.
The RAID-1 volume that mirrors c0t1d0s0 and c0t0d0s0 is named
d100.
filesys The /var file system is installed on the slice c0t1d0s5 and is sized at
500 Mbytes. The root (/) file system is created and mirrored on the slices
c0t1d0s0 and c0t0d0s0. The size of the root (/) file system is set to
200 Mbytes. The RAID-1 volume that mirrors c0t1d0s0 and c0t0d0s0
is named d100.
filesys The swap file system is created and mirrored on the slice c0t0d0s1, and
is sized at 512 Mbytes. The custom JumpStart program assigns a name to
the mirror.
metadb Five state database replicas (metadbs) are installed on slice c0t0d0s3,
and are sized at 8192 blocks (4 Mbytes).

Chapter 4 • Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations (Tasks) 69

 EXAMPLE 4–13 Creating RAID-1 Volumes to Mirror Multiple File Systems (Continued)

filesys The /usr file system is created and mirrored on the slices c0t1d0s4
and c0t0d0s4. The size of the /usr file system is set to 2000 Mbytes.
The custom JumpStart program assigns a name to the mirror.
■ For overview information about how to create mirrored file systems during your
installation, see Chapter 10.
■ For guidelines and requirements of creating mirrored file systems, see Chapter 11.
■ For descriptions of keyword values, see “filesys Profile Keyword (Creating
RAID-1 Volumes)” on page 144 and “metadb Profile Keyword (Creating State
Database Replicas)” on page 150.

EXAMPLE 4–14 x86: Using the fdisk Keyword

# profile keywords profile values
# ---------------- -------------------
install_type initial_install
system_type standalone

fdisk c0t0d0 0x04 delete

fdisk c0t0d0 solaris maxfree
cluster SUNWCall
cluster SUNWCacc delete

The following list describes some of the keywords and values from this example.
fdisk All fdisk partitions of type DOSOS16 (04 hexadecimal) are deleted
from the c0t0d0 disk.
fdisk A Solaris fdisk partition is created on the largest contiguous free space
on the c0t0d0 disk.
cluster The Entire Distribution software group, SUNWCall, is installed on the
system.
cluster The system accounting utilities, SUNWCacc, are not to be installed on the
system.

Testing a Profile
After you create a profile, use the pfinstall(1M) command to test the profile. Test
the profile before you use the profile to install or upgrade a system. Testing a profile is
especially useful when you are creating upgrade profiles that reallocate disk space.

70 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 By looking at the installation output that is generated by pfinstall, you can quickly
determine if a profile works as you intended. For example, use the profile to
determine if a system has enough disk space to upgrade to a new release of the Solaris
software before you perform the upgrade on that system.

pfinstall enables you to test a profile against the following:

■ The system’s disk configuration where pfinstall is being run.
■ Other disk configurations. You use a disk configuration file that represents a
structure of a disk, for example, a disk’s bytes/sector, flags, and slices. Creating
disk configuration files is described in “Creating Disk Configuration Files”
on page 86 and “x86: To Create a Disk Configuration File” on page 88.

Note – You cannot use a disk configuration file to test a profile you intend to use to
upgrade a system. Instead, you must test the profile against the system’s actual
disk configuration and the software that is currently installed on that system.

▼ To Create a Temporary Solaris Environment to Test

a Profile
To test a profile for a particular Solaris release successfully and accurately, you must
test a profile within the Solaris environment of the same release. For example, if you
want to test a Solaris initial installation profile, run the pfinstall command on a
system that is running the Solaris 10 OS.

You need to create a temporary installation environment if you are testing a profile
under one of the following conditions:
■ You want to test a Solaris 10 upgrade profile on a system that is running a previous
version of the Solaris software.
■ You do not have a Solaris 10 system installed yet to test Solaris 10 initial
installation profiles.

Steps 1. Boot a system from an image of one of the following:

For SPARC based systems:
■ Solaris 10 Operating System for SPARC Platforms DVD
■ Solaris 10 Software for SPARC Platforms - 1 CD
For x86 based systems:
■ Solaris 10 Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD
■ Solaris 10 Software for x86 Platforms - 1 CD

Chapter 4 • Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations (Tasks) 71

 Note – If you want to test an upgrade profile, boot the system that you are
upgrading.

2. Respond to the system identification questions.

3. To exit from the installation program, type ! at the following prompt.

Solaris Web Start will assist you in installing software for Solaris.
<Press ENTER to continue> {"!" exits}

4. Execute the pfinstall command from the shell. For details about using the
pfinstall command, see Step 7 in “To Test a Profile” on page 72.

▼ To Test a Profile
Steps 1. Locate a system on which to test the profile that is the same type of platform,
SPARC or x86, for which the profile was created.
If you are testing an upgrade profile, you must test the profile on the actual system
that you intend to upgrade.

2. Use the following decision table to determine what to do next.

Test Scenario Instructions

Test an initial installation profile and have a Become superuser on the system and go to
system that is running the Solaris 10 Step 5.
software.

Test an upgrade profile, or you do not have Create a temporary Solaris 10 environment
a system that is running Solaris 10 to test an to test the profile. For details, see “To Create
initial installation profile. a Temporary Solaris Environment to Test a
Profile” on page 71. Then, go to Step 3.

3. Create a temporary mount point.

# mkdir /tmp/mnt

4. Mount the directory that contains the profile or profiles that you want to test.

72 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
Mount Scenario Typing Instructions

Mount a remote NFS file system for systems

mount -F nfs server_name:path /tmp/mnt
on the network.

SPARC: Mount a UFS-formatted diskette.

mount -F ufs /dev/diskette /tmp/mnt

Mount a PCFS-formatted diskette.

mount -F pcfs /dev/diskette /tmp/mnt

5. To test the profile with a specific system memory size, set SYS_MEMSIZE to the
specific memory size in Mbytes.
# SYS_MEMSIZE=memory_size
# export SYS_MEMSIZE

6. Did you mount a directory in Step 4?

■ If yes, change the directory to /tmp/mnt.
# cd /tmp/mnt
■ If no, change the directory to where the profile is located, which is usually the
JumpStart directory.
# cd jumpstart_dir_path

7. Test the profile with the pfinstall(1M) command.

# /usr/sbin/install.d/pfinstall -D:-d disk_config_file -c path profile

Caution – You must include the -d or -D option. If you do not include one of these
options, pfinstall uses the profile you specify to install the Solaris software. All
of the data on the system is overwritten.

-D pfinstall uses the current system’s disk configuration to

test the profile. You must use the -D option to test an upgrade
profile.
-d disk_config_file pfinstall uses the disk configuration file, disk_config_file, to
test the profile. If disk_config_file is not located in the directory
where pfinstall is run, you must specify the path.

For instructions about how to create a disk configuration file,

see “Creating Disk Configuration Files” on page 86.

Chapter 4 • Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations (Tasks) 73

 Note – You cannot use the -d disk_config_file option with an
upgrade profile, install_type upgrade. You must always
test an upgrade profile against a system’s disk configuration,
that is, you must use the -D option.

-c path The path to the Solaris 10 software image. You use this
option, for example, if the system is using Volume Manager
to mount the Solaris 10 Software - 1 CD for your platform.

Note – The -c option is not required if you booted from a

Solaris 10 Operating System DVD or a Solaris 10 Software - 1
CD image for your platform. The DVD or CD image is
mounted on /cdrom as part of the booting process.

profile The name of the profile to test. If profile is not in the directory
where pfinstall is being run, you must specify the path.

Profile Test Examples

The following example shows how to use pfinstall to test a profile that is named
basic_prof. The profile is tested against the disk configuration on a system on
which the Solaris 10 software is installed. The basic_prof profile is located in the
/jumpstart directory, and the path to the Solaris 10 Software for SPARC Platforms -
1 CD or Solaris 10 Software for x86 Platforms - 1 CD image is specified because
Volume Manager is being used.

EXAMPLE 4–15 Profile Test Using a Solaris 10 System

# cd /jumpstart
# /usr/sbin/install.d/pfinstall -D -c /cdrom/pathname basic_prof

The following example shows how to use pfinstall to test the profile that is named
basic_prof on a Solaris 10 system. The test is performed against the 535_test disk
configuration file. The test checks for 64 Mbytes of system memory. This example uses
a Solaris 10 Software for SPARC Platforms - 1 CD or Solaris 10 Software for x86
Platforms - 1 CD image that is located in the /export/install directory.

74 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 EXAMPLE 4–16 Profile Test Using a Disk Configuration File
# SYS_MEMSIZE=64
# export SYS_MEMSIZE
# /usr/sbin/install.d/pfinstall -d 535_test -c /export/install basic_prof

Validating the rules File

Before you can use a profile and rules file, you must run the check script to validate
that the files are set up correctly. If all rules and profiles are correctly set up, the
rules.ok file is created, which is required by the custom JumpStart installation
software to match a system to a profile.

Table 4–2 describes what the check script does.

TABLE 4–2 What Happens When You Use the check Script

Stage Description

1 The rules file is checked for syntax.

check verifies that the rule keywords are legitimate and that the begin, class, and
finish fields are specified for each rule. The begin and finish fields can consist of a
minus sign (-) instead of a file name.

2 If no errors are found in the rules file, each profile that is specified in the rules is
checked for syntax.

3 If no errors are found, check creates the rules.ok file from the rules file,
removes all comments and blank lines, retains all rules, and adds the following
comment line at the end:
# version=2 checksum=num

▼ To Validate the rules File

Steps 1. Ensure that the check script is located in the JumpStart directory.

Note – The check script is in the Solaris_10 /Misc/jumpstart_sample

directory on the Solaris 10 Operating System DVD or on the Solaris 10 Software - 1
CD.

2. Change the directory to the JumpStart directory.

Chapter 4 • Preparing Custom JumpStart Installations (Tasks) 75

 3. Run the check script to validate the rules file:
$ ./check -p path -r file_name

-p path Validates the rules by using the check script from the Solaris 10
software image instead of the check script from the system you
are using. path is the image on a local disk or a mounted Solaris 10
Operating System DVD or a Solaris 10 Software - 1 CD.

Use this option to run the most recent version of check if your
system is running a previous version of Solaris.
-r file_name Specifies a rules file other than the one that is named rules. Using
this option, you can test the validity of a rule before you integrate
the rule into the rules file.
As the check script runs, the script reports the checking of the validity of the
rules file and each profile. If no errors are encountered, the script reports the
following information.
The custom JumpStart configuration is ok

4. Ensure that root owns the rules.ok file and that the permissions are set to 644.

See Also After you validate the rules file, you can learn more about optional custom
JumpStart features in Chapter 5. You can learn about performing custom JumpStart
installations in Chapter 7.

76 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
CHAPTER 5

Using Optional Custom JumpStart

Features (Tasks)

This chapter describes the optional features that are available to create additional
custom JumpStart installation tools.
■ “Creating Begin Scripts” on page 77
■ “Creating Finish Scripts” on page 79
■ “Creating a Compressed Configuration File” on page 85
■ “Creating Disk Configuration Files” on page 86
■ “Using a Site-Specific Installation Program” on page 92

Note – Instructions in this chapter are valid for either a SPARC server or an x86 server
that is being used to provide custom JumpStart files, called a profile server. A profile
server can provide custom JumpStart files for different platform types. For example, a
SPARC server can provide custom JumpStart files for both SPARC based systems and
x86 based systems.

Creating Begin Scripts

A begin script is a user-defined Bourne shell script that you specify in the rules file.
A begin script performs tasks before the Solaris software is installed on a system. You
can use begin scripts only when using custom JumpStart to install the Solaris software.

Use a begin script to perform one of the following tasks:

■ Creating derived profiles
■ Backing up files before upgrading

77
 Important Information About Begin Scripts
■ Do not specify something in the script that would prevent the mounting of file
systems onto /a during an initial or upgrade installation. If the JumpStart program
cannot mount the file systems onto /a, an error occurs and installation fails.
■ During the installation, output from the begin script is deposited in
/tmp/begin.log. After the installation is completed, the log file is redirected to
/var/sadm/system/logs/begin.log.
■ Ensure that root owns the begin script and that the permissions are set to 644.
■ You can use custom JumpStart environment variables in your begin scripts. For a
list of environment variables, see “Custom JumpStart Environment Variables”
on page 165.
■ Save begin scripts in the JumpStart directory.

Creating Derived Profiles With a Begin Script

A derived profile is a profile that is dynamically created by a begin script during a
custom JumpStart installation. Derived profiles are needed when you cannot set up
the rules file to match specific systems to a profile. For example, you might need to
use derived profiles for identical system models that have different hardware
components, such as systems that contain different frame buffers.

To set up a rule to use a derived profile, you must perform the following tasks:
■ Set the profile field to an equal sign (=) instead of a profile.
■ Set the begin field to a begin script that creates a derived profile that depends on
the system on which you intend to install Solaris.

When a system matches a rule with the profile field equal to an equal sign (=), the
begin script creates the derived profile that is used to install the Solaris software on the
system.

The following is an example of a begin script that creates the same derived profile
every time. You can write a begin script to create different derived profiles that depend
on the evaluation of rules.
EXAMPLE 5–1 Begin Script That Creates a Derived Profile
#!/bin/sh
echo "install_type initial_install" > ${SI_PROFILE}
echo "system_type standalone" >> ${SI_PROFILE}
echo "partitioning default" >> ${SI_PROFILE}
echo "cluster SUNWCprog" >> ${SI_PROFILE}
echo "package SUNWman delete" >> ${SI_PROFILE}
echo "package SUNWolman delete" >> ${SI_PROFILE}
echo "package SUNWxwman delete" >> ${SI_PROFILE}

In the example, the begin script must use the SI_PROFILE environment variable for
the name of the derived profile, which is set to /tmp/install.input by default.

78 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
Note – If a begin script is used to create a derived profile, ensure the script does not
have any errors. A derived profile is not verified by the check script because derived
profiles are not created until the execution of the begin script.

Creating Finish Scripts

A finish script is a user-defined Bourne shell script that you specify in the rules file.
A finish script performs tasks after the Solaris software is installed on a system, but
before the system reboots. You can use finish scripts only when using custom
JumpStart to install Solaris.

Tasks that you can perform with a finish script include the following:
■ Adding files
■ Adding individual packages or patches in addition to the ones that are installed in
a particular software group
■ Customizing the root environment
■ Setting the system’s root password
■ Installing additional software

Important Information About Finish Scripts

■ The Solaris installation program mounts the system’s file systems on /a. The file
systems remain mounted on /a until the system reboots. You can use the finish
script to add, change, or remove files from the newly installed file system hierarchy
by modifying the file systems that are respective to /a.
■ During the installation, output from the finish script is deposited in
/tmp/finish.log. After the installation is completed, the log file is redirected to
/var/sadm/system/logs/finish.log.
■ Ensure that root owns the finish script and that the permissions are set to 644.
■ You can use custom JumpStart environment variables in your finish scripts. For a
list of environment variables, see “Custom JumpStart Environment Variables”
on page 165.
■ Save finish scripts in the JumpStart directory.

Chapter 5 • Using Optional Custom JumpStart Features (Tasks) 79

 ▼ To Add Files With a Finish Script
Through a finish script, you can add files from the JumpStart directory to an already
installed system. You can add the files because the JumpStart directory is mounted on
the directory that is specified by the SI_CONFIG_DIR variable. The directory is set to
/tmp/install_config by default.

Note – You can also replace files by copying files from the JumpStart directory to
already existing files on the installed system.

Steps 1. Copy all of the files that you are adding to the installed system to the JumpStart
directory.

2. Insert the following line in the finish script for each file that you want to be
copied to the newly installed file system hierarchy:
cp ${SI_CONFIG_DIR}/file_name /a/path_name

Example 5–2 Adding a File With a Finish Script

For example, assume you have a special application, site_prog, developed for all
users at your site. If you place a copy of site_prog into the JumpStart directory, the
following line in a finish script copies site_prog from the JumpStart directory into a
system’s /usr/bin directory:
cp ${SI_CONFIG_DIR}/site_prog /a/usr/bin

Adding Packages or Patches With a Finish Script

You can create a finish script to automatically add packages or patches after the Solaris
software is installed on a system. By adding packages with a finish script, you reduce
time and ensure consistency in which packages and patches are installed on different
systems at your site.

When you use the pkgadd(1M) or patchadd(1M) commands in finish scripts, use the
-R option to specify /a as the root path.
■ Example 5–3 shows an example of a finish script that adds packages.
■ Example 5–4 shows an example of a finish script that adds patches.

EXAMPLE 5–3 Adding Packages With a Finish Script

#!/bin/sh

BASE=/a
MNT=/a/mnt

80 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 EXAMPLE 5–3 Adding Packages With a Finish Script (Continued)

ADMIN_FILE=/a/tmp/admin

mkdir ${MNT}
mount -f nfs sherlock:/export/package ${MNT}
cat >${ADMIN_FILE} <<DONT_ASK
mail=root
instance=overwrite
partial=nocheck
runlevel=nocheck
idepend=nocheck
rdepend=nocheck
space=ask
setuid=nocheck
conflict=nocheck
action=nocheck
basedir=default
DONT_ASK

/usr/sbin/pkgadd -a ${ADMIN_FILE} -d ${MNT} -R ${BASE} SUNWxyz

umount ${MNT}
rmdir ${MNT}

The following describes some commands for this example.

■ The following command mounts a directory on a server that contains the package
to install.
mount -f nfs sherlock:/export/package ${MNT}
■ The following command creates a temporary package administration file, admin,
to force the pkgadd(1M) command not to perform checks or prompt for questions
when installing a package. Use the temporary package administration file to
maintain a hands-off installation when you are adding packages.
cat >${ADMIN_FILE} <<DONT_ASK
■ The following pkgadd command adds the package by using the -a option,
specifying the package administration file, and the -R option, specifying the root
path.
/usr/sbin/pkgadd -a ${ADMIN_FILE} -d ${MNT} -R ${BASE} SUNWxyz

EXAMPLE 5–4 Adding Patches With a Finish Script

#!/bin/sh

########
#
# USER-CONFIGURABLE OPTIONS
#
########

# The location of the patches to add to the system after it’s installed.

Chapter 5 • Using Optional Custom JumpStart Features (Tasks) 81

EXAMPLE 5–4 Adding Patches With a Finish Script (Continued)

# The OS rev (5.x) and the architecture (‘mach‘) will be added to the
# root. For example, /foo on a 8 SPARC would turn into /foo/5.8/sparc
LUPATCHHOST=ins3525-svr
LUPATCHPATHROOT=/export/solaris/patchdb
#########
#
# NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS PAST THIS POINT
#
#########

BASEDIR=/a

# Figure out the source and target OS versions

echo Determining OS revisions...
SRCREV=‘uname -r‘
echo Source $SRCREV

LUPATCHPATH=$LUPATCHPATHROOT/$SRCREV/‘mach‘

#
# Add the patches needed
#
echo Adding OS patches
mount $LUPATCHHOST:$LUPATCHPATH /mnt >/dev/null 2>&1
if [ $? = 0 ] ; then
for patch in ‘cat /mnt/*Recommended/patch_order‘ ; do
(cd /mnt/*Recommended/$patch ; echo yes | patchadd -u -d -R $BASEDIR .)
done
cd /tmp
umount /mnt
else
echo "No patches found"
if

Note – In the past, the chroot(1M) command was used with the pkgadd and
patchadd commands in the finish script environment. In rare instances, some
packages or patches do not work with the -R option. You must create a dummy
/etc/mnttab file in the /a root path before issuing the chroot command.

To create a dummy /etc/mnttab file, add the following line to your finish script:
cp /etc/mnttab /a/etc/mnttab

82 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 Customizing the Root Environment With a Finish
Script
You can also use finish scripts to customize files that are already installed on a system.
For example, the finish script in Example 5–5 customizes the root environment by
appending information to the .cshrc file in the root (/) directory.
EXAMPLE 5–5 Customizing the Root Environment With a Finish Script
#!/bin/sh
#
# Customize root’s environment
#
echo "***adding customizations in /.cshrc"
test -f a/.cshrc || {
cat >> a/.cshrc <<EOF
set history=100 savehist=200 filec ignoreeof prompt="\$user@‘uname -n‘> "
alias cp cp -i
alias mv mv -i
alias rm rm -i
alias ls ls -FC
alias h history
alias c clear
unset autologout
EOF
}

Setting a System’s Root Password With a Finish

Script
After the Solaris software is installed on a system, the system reboots. Before the boot
process is completed, the system prompts for the root password. Until someone types
a password, the system cannot finish booting.

A finish script that is named set_root_pw is saved in the auto_install_sample

directory. The finish script shows how to set the root password automatically, without
prompting. set_root_pw is shown in Example 5–6.

Note – If you set the system’s root password with a finish script, users might attempt
to discover the root password from the encrypted password in your finish script.
Ensure that you safeguard against users who might try to determine the root
password.

EXAMPLE 5–6 Setting the System’s Root Password With a Finish Script
#!/bin/sh
#
# @(#)set_root_pw 1.4 93/12/23 SMI

Chapter 5 • Using Optional Custom JumpStart Features (Tasks) 83

 EXAMPLE 5–6 Setting the System’s Root Password With a Finish Script (Continued)

#
# This is an example Bourne shell script to be run after installation.
# It sets the system’s root password to the entry defined in PASSWD.
# The encrypted password is obtained from an existing root password entry
# in /etc/shadow from an installed machine.

echo "setting password for root"

# set the root password

PASSWD=dKO5IBkSF42lw
#create a temporary input file
cp /a/etc/shadow /a/etc/shadow.orig

mv /a/etc/shadow /a/etc/shadow.orig
nawk -F: ’{
if ( $1 == "root" )
printf"%s:%s:%s:%s:%s:%s:%s:%s:%s\n",$1,passwd,$3,$4,$5,$6,$7,$8,$9
else
printf"%s:%s:%s:%s:%s:%s:%s:%s:%s\n",$1,$2,$3,$4,$5,$6,$7,$8,$9
}’ passwd="$PASSWD" /a/etc/shadow.orig > /a/etc/shadow
#remove the temporary file
rm -f /a/etc/shadow.orig
# set the flag so sysidroot won’t prompt for the root password
sed -e ’s/0 # root/1 # root/’ ${SI_SYS_STATE} > /tmp/state.$$
mv /tmp/state.$$ ${SI_SYS_STATE}

The following describes some of the commands in this example.

■ The following command sets the variable PASSWD to an encrypted root password
that is obtained from an existing entry in a system’s /etc/shadow file.
#create a temporary input file
■ The following command creates a temporary input file of /a/etc/shadow.
cp /a/etc/shadow /a/etc/shadow.orig
■ The following command changes the root entry in the /etc/shadow file for the
newly installed system by using $PASSWD as the password field.
if ( $1 == "root" )
■ The following command removes the temporary /a/etc/shadow file.
rm -f /a/etc/shadow.orig
■ The following command changes the entry from 0 to a 1 in the state file so that the
user is not prompted for the root password. The state file is accessed by using the
variable SI_SYS_STATE, which has a value currently of
/a/etc/.sysIDtool.state. To avoid problems with your scripts if this value
changes, always reference this file by using $SI_SYS_STATE. The sed command
that is shown here contains a tab character after the 0 and after the 1.
sed -e ’s/0 # root/1 # root/’ ${SI_SYS_STATE} > /tmp/state.$$

84 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 Non-Interactive Installations With Finish Scripts
You can use finish scripts to install additional software after the Solaris OS is installed.
The Solaris installation program prompts you to enter information during the
installation. To maintain a hands-off installation, you can run the Solaris installation
program with the -nodisplay or -noconsole options.

TABLE 5–1 Solaris Installation Options

Option Description

-nodisplay Runs the installer without a graphic user interface. Use the
default product installation unless the installation was
modified by the -locales option.

-noconsole Runs the installation without any interactive text console

device. Useful when paired with -nodisplay for UNIX
script use.

For more information, see the man page installer(1M).

Creating a Compressed Configuration

File
Rather than using the add_install_client command to specify the location of the
custom JumpStart configuration files, you can specify the location of the files when
you boot the system. However, you can only specify the name of one file when you
issue the boot command. As a result, you must compress all of the custom JumpStart
configuration files into one file. The compressed configuration file can be one of the
following types:
■ tar
■ Compressed tar
■ zip
■ bzip tar

▼ To Create a Compressed Configuration File

Steps 1. Change the directory to the JumpStart directory on the profile server.
# cd jumpstart_dir_path

Chapter 5 • Using Optional Custom JumpStart Features (Tasks) 85

 2. Use a compression tool to compress the custom JumpStart configuration files
into one file.

Note – The compressed configuration file cannot contain relative paths. The custom
JumpStart configuration files must be in the same directory as the compressed file.

The compressed configuration file must contain the following files:

■ Profile
■ rules
■ rules.ok
You can also include the sysidcfg file in the compressed configuration file.

3. Save the compressed configuration file on an NFS server, an HTTP server, or on a

local hard disk.

Compressed Configuration File Example

The following example shows how to use the tar command to create a compressed
configuration file that is named config.tar. The custom JumpStart configuration
files are located in the /jumpstart directory.
EXAMPLE 5–7 Creating a Compressed Configuration File
# cd /jumpstart
# tar -cvf config.tar *
a profile 1K
a rules 1K
a rules.ok 1K
a sysidcfg 1K

Creating Disk Configuration Files

This section describes how to create single-disk and multiple-disk configuration files.
Disk configuration files enable you to use pfinstall(1M) from a single system to
test profiles against different disk configurations.

▼ SPARC: To Create a Disk Configuration File

Steps 1. Locate a SPARC based system with a disk you want to test.

2. Become superuser or assume an equivalent role.

86 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 Roles contain authorizations and privileged commands. For more information
about roles, see “Configuring RBAC (Task Map)” in System Administration Guide:
Security Services.

3. Create a single–disk configuration file by redirecting the output of the

prtvtoc(1M) command to a file.
# prtvtoc /dev/rdsk/device_name >disk_config_file

/dev/rdsk/device_name The device name of the system’s disk. device_name

must be in the form cwtxdys2 or cxdys2.
disk_config_file The name of the disk configuration file.

4. Determine if you are testing the installation of Solaris software on multiple

disks.
■ If no, stop. You are finished.
■ If yes, concatenate the single–disk configuration files and save the output in a
new file.
# cat disk_file1 disk_file2 >multi_disk_config

The new file becomes the multiple-disk configuration file, as in the following
example.
# cat 104_disk2 104_disk3 104_disk5 >multi_disk_test

5. Determine if the target numbers in the disk device names are unique in the
multiple-disk configuration file that you created in the previous step.
■ If yes, stop. You are finished.
■ If no, open the file with a text editor and make the target numbers unique in the
disk device names.
For example, assume that the file contains the same target number, t0, for
different disk device names, as shown here.
* /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s2 partition map
...
* /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s2 partition map

Change the second target number to t2, as shown here:

* /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s2 partition map
...
* /dev/rdsk/c0t2d0s2 partition map

Chapter 5 • Using Optional Custom JumpStart Features (Tasks) 87

 SPARC: Disk Configuration File Example
The following example shows how to create a single–disk configuration file,
104_test, on a SPARC based system with a 104-Mbyte disk.

EXAMPLE 5–8 SPARC: Creating a Disk Configuration File

You redirect the output of the prtvtoc command to a single–disk configuration file
that is named 104_test:
# prtvtoc /dev/rdsk/c0t3d0s2 >104_test

The contents of the 104_test file resemble the following:

* /dev/rdsk/c0t3d0s2 partition map
*
* Dimensions:
* 512 bytes/sector
* 72 sectors/track
* 14 tracks/cylinder
* 1008 sectors/cylinder
* 2038 cylinders* 2036 accessible cylinders
* Flags:
* 1: unmountable
* 10: read-only
*
* First Sector Last
* Partition Tag Flags Sector Count Sector Mount Directory
1 2 00 0 164304 164303 /
2 5 00 0 2052288 2052287
3 0 00 164304 823536 987839 /disk2/b298
5 0 00 987840 614880 1602719 /install/298/sparc/work
7 0 00 1602720 449568 2052287 /space

You have created disk configuration files for a SPARC based system. “Testing a
Profile” on page 70 contains information about using disk configuration files to test
profiles.

▼ x86: To Create a Disk Configuration File

Steps 1. Locate an x86 based system that contains a disk that you are testing.

2. Become superuser or assume an equivalent role.

Roles contain authorizations and privileged commands. For more information
about roles, see “Configuring RBAC (Task Map)” in System Administration Guide:
Security Services.

88 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
3. Create part of the single-disk configuration file by saving the output of the
fdisk(1M) command in a file.
# fdisk -R -W disk_config_file -h /dev/rdsk/device_name

disk_config_file The name of a disk configuration file.

/dev/rdsk/device_name The device name of the fdisk layout of the entire
disk. device_name must be in the form cwtxdys0 or
cxdys0.

4. Append the output of the prtvtoc(1M) command to the disk configuration file:
# prtvtoc /dev/rdsk/device_name >>disk_config

/dev/rdsk/device_name The device name of the system’s disk. device_name

must be in the form cwtxdys2 or cxdys2.
disk_config The name of the disk configuration file.

5. Determine if you are testing the installation of Solaris software on multiple

disks.
■ If no, stop. You are finished.
■ If yes, concatenate the single-disk configuration files and save the output in a
new file.
# cat disk_file1 disk_file2 >multi_disk_config

The new file becomes the multiple-disk configuration file, as in the following
example.
# cat 104_disk2 104_disk3 104_disk5 >multi_disk_test

6. Determine if the target numbers in the disk device names are unique in the
multiple-disk configuration file that you created in the previous step.
■ If yes, stop. You are finished.
■ If no, open the file with a text editor and make the target numbers unique.
For example, the file might contain the same target number, t0, for different
disk device names as shown here:
* /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s2 partition map
...
* /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s2 partition map

Change the second target number to t2, as shown here:

* /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s2 partition map
...
* /dev/rdsk/c0t2d0s2 partition map

Chapter 5 • Using Optional Custom JumpStart Features (Tasks) 89

 x86: Disk Configuration File Example
The following example shows how to create a single-disk configuration file,
500_test, on an x86 based system that contains a 500-Mbyte disk.

EXAMPLE 5–9 x86: Creating a Disk Configuration File

First, you save the output of the fdisk command to a file that is named 500_test:
# fdisk -R -W 500_test -h /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0p0

The 500_test file looks like the following:

* /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0p0 default fdisk table
* Dimensions:
* 512 bytes/sector
* 94 sectors/track
* 15 tracks/cylinder
* 1455 cylinders
*
* HBA Dimensions:
* 512 bytes/sector
* 94 sectors/track
* 15 tracks/cylinder
* 1455 cylinders
*
* systid:
* 1: DOSOS12
* 2: PCIXOS
* 4: DOSOS16
* 5: EXTDOS
* 6: DOSBIG
* 86: DOSDATA
* 98: OTHEROS
* 99: UNIXOS
* 130: SUNIXOS
*
* Id Act Bhead Bsect Bcyl Ehead Esect Ecyl Rsect Numsect
130 128 44 3 0 46 30 1001 1410 2050140

Second, you append the output of the prtvtoc command to the 500_test file:
# prtvtoc /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s2 >>500_test

The 500_test file is now a complete disk configuration file:

* /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0p0 default fdisk table
* Dimensions:
* 512 bytes/sector
* 94 sectors/track
* 15 tracks/cylinder
* 1455 cylinders
*
* HBA Dimensions:

90 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 EXAMPLE 5–9 x86: Creating a Disk Configuration File (Continued)

* 512 bytes/sector
* 94 sectors/track
* 15 tracks/cylinder
* 1455 cylinders
*
* systid:
* 1: DOSOS12
* 2: PCIXOS
* 4: DOSOS16
* 5: EXTDOS
* 6: DOSBIG
* 86: DOSDATA
* 98: OTHEROS
* 99: UNIXOS
* 130: SUNIXOS
*
* Id Act Bhead Bsect Bcyl Ehead Esec Ecyl Rsect Numsect
130 128 44 3 0 46 30 1001 1410 2050140
* /dev/rdsk/c0t0d0s2 partition map
*
* Dimensions:
* 512 bytes/sector
* 94 sectors/track
* 15 tracks/cylinder
* 1110 sectors/cylinder
* 1454 cylinders
* 1452 accessible cylinders
*
* Flags:
* 1: unmountable
* 10: read-only
* First Sector Last
* Partition Tag Flags Sector Count Sector Mount Directory
2 5 01 1410 2045910 2047319
7 6 00 4230 2043090 2047319 /space
8 1 01 0 1410 1409
9 9 01 1410 2820 422987

You have created disk configuration files for an x86 based system. “Testing a Profile”
on page 70 contains information about using disk configuration files to test profiles.

Chapter 5 • Using Optional Custom JumpStart Features (Tasks) 91

 Using a Site-Specific Installation
Program
You can also use begin and finish scripts to create your own installation program to
install Solaris software.

When you specify a minus sign (-) in the profile field, begin and finish scripts control
how Solaris software is installed on a system instead of the profile and the Solaris
installation program.

For example, if the following rule matches a system, the x_install.beg begin script
and the x_install.fin finish script install Solaris software on the system that is
named clover:
hostname clover x_install.beg - x_install.fin

92 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
CHAPTER 6

Creating Custom Rule and Probe

Keywords (Tasks)

This chapter provides information and procedures for creating your own custom rule
and probe keywords.
■ “Probe Keywords” on page 93
■ “Creating a custom_probes File” on page 94
■ “Validating the custom_probes File” on page 97

Probe Keywords
To understand what a probe keyword is, you first need to recall what a rule keyword
is. A rule keyword is a predefined lexical unit or word that describes a general system
attribute, such as host name, hostname, or memory size, memsize. Rule keywords
and the values that are associated with them enable you to match a system that has
the same attribute to a profile. This match of a system’s attributes defines how the
Solaris software is to be installed on each system in the group.

Custom JumpStart environment variables, which you use in begin and finish scripts,
are set on demand. For example, information about which operating system is already
installed on a system is only available in SI_INSTALLED after the installed rule
keyword is used.

In some situations, you might need to extract the same information in a begin or finish
script for a purpose other than to match a system and run a profile. Probe keywords
provide the solution. Probe keywords extract attribute information and remove the
need for you to set up a matching condition and run a profile.

For a list of probe keywords and values, see “Probe Keywords and Values” on page
167.

93
 Creating a custom_probes File
The rule and probe keywords that are described in “Rule Keywords and Values”
on page 121 and “Probe Keywords and Values” on page 167 might not be precise
enough for your needs. You can define your own custom rule or probe keywords by
creating a custom_probes file.

The custom_probes file is a Bourne shell script that contains two types of functions.
You must save the custom_probes file in the same JumpStart directory where you
saved the rules file. The two types of functions that you can define in a
custom_probes file are as follows:
■ Probe – Gathers the information you want or does the actual work and sets a
corresponding SI_ environment variable that you define. Probe functions become
probe keywords.
■ Comparison – Calls a corresponding probe function, compares the output of the
probe function, and returns 0 if the keyword matches or 1 if the keyword does not
match. Comparison functions become rule keywords.

Syntax of the custom_probes File

The custom_probes file can contain any valid Bourne shell command, variable, or
algorithm.

Note – You can define probe and comparison functions that require a single argument
in the custom_probes file. When you use the corresponding custom probe keyword
in the rules file, the argument after the keyword is interpreted (as $1).

When you use the corresponding custom rule keyword in the rules file, the
arguments are interpreted in sequence. The sequence starts after the keyword and
ends before the next && or begin script, whichever comes first.

The custom_probes file must meet the following requirements:

■ Have the name custom_probes
■ Have root as its owner
■ Be executable and have permissions set to 755
■ Contain at least one probe function and one corresponding comparison function

To improve clarity and organization, define all probe functions first, at the top of the
file, followed by all comparison functions.

94 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 Syntax of Function Names in custom_probes
The name of a probe function must begin with probe_. The name of a comparison
function must begin with cmp_.

Functions that begin with probe_ define new probe keywords. For example, the
function probe_tcx defines the new probe keyword tcx. Functions that begin with
cmp_ define new rule keywords. For example, cmp_tcx defines the new rule keyword
tcx.

▼ To Create a custom_probes File

Steps 1. Use a text editor to create a Bourne shell script text file. Name the file
custom_probes.

2. In the custom_probes text file, define your probe and comparison functions.

Note – You can define probe and comparison functions that require arguments in
the custom_probes file. When you use the corresponding custom probe keyword
in the rules file, the arguments after the keyword are interpreted in sequence (as
$1, $2, and so on).

When you use the corresponding custom rule keyword in the rules file, the
arguments are interpreted in sequence. The sequence starts after the keyword and
ends before the next && or begin script, whichever comes first.

3. Save the custom_probes file in the JumpStart directory next to the rules file.

4. Ensure that root owns the rules file and that the permissions are set to 644.

Examples of a custom_probes File and Keyword

You can find additional examples of probe and comparison functions in the following
directories:
■ /usr/sbin/install.d/chkprobe on a system that has the Solaris software
installed
■ /Solaris_10/Tools/Boot/usr/sbin/install.d/chkprobe on the Solaris
10 Operating System DVD or on the Solaris 10 Software - 1 CD

The following custom_probes file contains a probe and comparison function that
tests for the presence of a TCX graphics card.

Chapter 6 • Creating Custom Rule and Probe Keywords (Tasks) 95

 EXAMPLE 6–1 custom_probes File
#!/bin/sh
#
# custom_probe script to test for the presence of a TCX graphics card.
#

#
# PROBE FUNCTIONS
#
probe_tcx() {
SI_TCX=‘modinfo | grep tcx | nawk ’{print $6}’‘
export SI_TCX
}

#
# COMPARISON FUNCTIONS
#
cmp_tcx() {
probe_tcx

if [ "X${SI_TCX}" = "X${1}" ]; then

return 0
else
return 1
if
}

The following example rules file shows the use of the probe keyword that is defined
in the preceding example, tcx. If a TCX graphics card is installed and found in a
system, profile_tcx is run. Otherwise, profile is run.

Note – Always place probe keywords at or near the beginning of the rules file. This
placement ensures that the keywords are read and run before other rule keywords that
might rely on the probe keywords.

EXAMPLE 6–2 Custom Probe Keyword Used in a rules File

probe tcx
tcx tcx - profile_tcx -
any any - profile -

96 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 Validating the custom_probes File
Before you can use a profile, rules, and custom_probes file, you must run the
check script to validate that the files are set up correctly. If all profiles, rules, and
probe and comparison functions are correctly set up, the rules.ok and
custom_probes.ok files are created. Table 6–1 describes what the check script does.
TABLE 6–1 What Happens When You Use the check Script

Stage Description

1 check searches for a custom_probes file.

2 If the file exists, check creates the custom_probes.ok file from the
custom_probes file, removes all comments and blank lines, and retains all
Bourne shell commands, variables, and algorithms. Then, check adds the
following comment line at the end:
# version=2 checksum=num

▼ To Validate the custom_probes File

Steps 1. Verify that the check script is located in the JumpStart directory.

Note – The check script is in the Solaris_10 /Misc/jumpstart_sample

directory on the Solaris 10 Operating System DVD or on the Solaris 10 Software - 1
CD.

2. Change to the JumpStart directory.

3. Run the check script to validate the rules and custom_probes files.
$ ./check -p path -r file_name

-p path Validates the custom_probes file by using the check script from
the Solaris 10 software image for your platform instead of the
check script from the system you are using. path is the image on a
local disk or a mounted Solaris 10 Operating System DVD or
Solaris 10 Software - 1 CD.

Use this option to run the most recent version of check if your
system is running a previous version of Solaris.
-r file_name Specifies a file name other than the one that is named
custom_probes. By using the -r option, you can test the validity

Chapter 6 • Creating Custom Rule and Probe Keywords (Tasks) 97

 of a set of functions before integrating the functions into the
custom_probes file.
As the check script runs, the script reports the validity of the rules and
custom_probes files and each profile. If no errors are encountered, the script
reports: “The custom JumpStart configuration is ok” and creates the rules.ok
and custom_probes.ok files in the JumpStart directory.

4. Determine if the custom_probes.ok file is executable.

■ If yes, go to Step 5.
■ If no, type the following command.
# chmod +x custom_probes

5. Ensure that root owns the custom_probes.ok file and that the permissions are
set to 755.

98 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
CHAPTER 7

Performing a Custom JumpStart

Installation (Tasks)

This chapter describes how to perform a custom JumpStart installation on a SPARC

based or an x86 based system. You need to follow these procedures on the system on
which you intend to install the Solaris 10 software.
■ “SPARC: To Perform an Installation or Upgrade With the Custom JumpStart
Program” on page 103
■ “x86: To Perform an Installation or Upgrade With the Custom JumpStart Program”
on page 106

SPARC: Task Map: Setting Up a System

for a Custom JumpStart Installation
TABLE 7–1 Task Map: Setting Up a System for a Custom JumpStart Installation

Task Description For Instructions

Check if the system is Check the hardware Solaris 10 Sun Hardware

supported. documentation for system Platform Guide at
support in the Solaris 10 http://docs.sun.com
environment.

Check if the system has Verify that you have planned Chapter 2
enough disk space for the enough space to install the
Solaris software. Solaris software on your
system.

99
 TABLE 7–1 Task Map: Setting Up a System for a Custom JumpStart Installation
(Continued)
Task Description For Instructions

(Optional) Set system You can preconfigure system Chapter 4, “Preconfiguring

parameters. information to avoid being System Configuration
prompted for the information Information (Tasks),” in
during the installation or Solaris 10 Installation Guide:
upgrade. Network-Based Installations

Prepare the system for custom Create and validate a rules Chapter 4
JumpStart installation. file and profile files.

(Optional) Prepare optional If you are using begin scripts, Chapter 5 and Chapter 6
custom JumpStart features. finish scripts, or other
optional features, prepare the
scripts or files.

(Optional) Prepare to install To install a system from a Chapter 6, “Preparing to

the Solaris software from the remote Solaris 10 Operating Install From the Network
network. System DVD or Solaris 10 With DVD Media (Tasks),” in
Software for SPARC Platforms Solaris 10 Installation Guide:
CD image, you need to set up Network-Based Installations
the system to boot and install
Chapter 7, “Preparing to
from an install server or a
Install From the Network
boot server.
With CD Media (Tasks),” in
Solaris 10 Installation Guide:
Network-Based Installations

(Optional) Prepare for a Set up specifics for a Solaris “To Prepare to Install a Solaris
Solaris Flash archive Flash archive installation. Flash Archive With a Custom
installation. JumpStart Installation”
on page 101

Perform an installation or Boot the system to initiate the “SPARC: To Perform an

upgrade. installation or upgrade. Installation or Upgrade With
the Custom JumpStart
Program” on page 103

100 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 SPARC: Performing a Custom JumpStart
Installation
During a custom JumpStart installation, the JumpStart program attempts to match the
system that is being installed to the rules in the rules.ok file. The JumpStart
program reads the rules from the first rule through the last. A match occurs when the
system that is being installed matches all the system attributes that are defined in the
rule. When a system matches a rule, the JumpStart program stops reading the
rules.ok file and begins to install the system, based on the matched rule’s profile.

▼ To Prepare to Install a Solaris Flash Archive With a

Custom JumpStart Installation
You can install a full archive for an initial installation or if you have already installed
an archive, a differential archive for an update. You can use the custom JumpStart
installation method or use Solaris Live Upgrade to install an archive on an inactive
boot environment. This procedure provides the instructions to install an archive with
custom JumpStart.
■ For an overview of a full or differential archive, see Chapter 1, “Solaris Flash
(Overview),” in Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Solaris Flash Archives (Creation and
Installation).
■ For procedures about installing an archive on an inactive boot environment by
using Solaris Live Upgrade, see “To Install a Solaris Flash Archive With a Profile
(Command-Line Interface)” in Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Solaris Live Upgrade and
Upgrade Planning.

Steps 1. On the install server, create the custom JumpStart rules file.
For detailed instructions about creating custom JumpStart files, refer to Chapter 4.

2. On the install server, create the custom JumpStart profile file.

For examples of Solaris Flash archive profiles, see “Profile Examples” on page 61.
From the existing list of custom JumpStart keywords in Table 9–2, the only
keywords valid when you install a Solaris Flash archive are the following:

Keyword Initial Installation Differential Archive

(required) X X
archive_location

Chapter 7 • Performing a Custom JumpStart Installation (Tasks) 101

 Keyword Initial Installation Differential Archive

fdisk (x86 only) X X

filesys X
Note – You cannot set the
filesys keyword to the
value auto.

forced_deployment X

(required) install_type X X

local_customization X X

no_content_check X

no_master_check X

package X

root_device X X

a. Set the value of the keyword install_type to one of the following types.
■ For a full archive installation, set the value to flash_install.
■ For a differential archive installation, set the value to flash_update.

b. Add the path to the Solaris Flash archive by using the archive_location
keyword.
For details about the archive_location keyword, refer to
“archive_location Keyword” on page 127.

c. Specify the file system configuration.

The Solaris Flash archive extraction process does not support auto-layout of
partitions.

d. (Optional) If you want to install additional packages at the same time you
install an archive, use the package keyword. For more information, see
“package Profile Keyword” on page 152.

e. (Optional) If you want to install an additional Solaris Flash archive on the

clone system, add one archive_location line for each archive that you
want to install.

3. On the install server, add the clients that you are installing with the Solaris
Flash archive.
For detailed instructions, refer to the following:
■ “Adding Systems to Be Installed From the Network With a DVD Image” in
Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations

102 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 ■ “Adding Systems to Be Installed From the Network With a CD Image” in
Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations

4. Perform the custom JumpStart installation on the clone systems.

For detailed instructions, refer to “SPARC: To Perform an Installation or Upgrade
With the Custom JumpStart Program” on page 103.

▼ SPARC: To Perform an Installation or Upgrade

With the Custom JumpStart Program
Steps 1. If the system is part of a network, ensure that an Ethernet connector or similar
network adapter is attached to your system.

2. If you are installing a system that is connected through a tip(1) line, ensure that
your window display is at least 80 columns wide and 24 rows long.
To determine the current dimensions of your tip window, use the stty(1)
command.

3. If you are using the system’s DVD-ROM or CD-ROM drive to install the Solaris
10 software, insert the Solaris 10 Operating System for SPARC Platforms DVD
or the Solaris 10 Software for SPARC Platforms - 1 CD in the drive.

4. If you are using a profile diskette, insert the profile diskette in the system’s
diskette drive.

5. Boot the system.

■ If the system is new, out–of–the–box, turn on the system.
■ If you want to install or upgrade an existing system, shut down the system. At
the ok prompt, type the following command.
ok boot cdrom:net - install url:ask dhcp nowin

cdrom Specifies to boot from a CD or a DVD.

For a system with an older EEPROM, replace cdrom with

sd(0,6,2) to boot from the system’s CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive.
net Specifies to boot from an install server on the network.
url Specifies the location of the custom JumpStart files. You can specify a
URL for files that are located in the following places:
■ Local hard disk
file://jumpstart_dir_path/compressed_config_file
■ NFS server
nfs://server_name:IP_address/jumpstart_dir_path/compressed_config_file

Chapter 7 • Performing a Custom JumpStart Installation (Tasks) 103

 ■ HTTP server
http://server_name:IP_address/jumpstart_dir_path/
compressed_config_file&proxy_info

If you placed a sysidcfg file in the compressed configuration file,

you must specify the IP address of the server that contains the file, as
in the following example:
http://131.141.2.32/jumpstart/config.tar

If you saved the compressed configuration file on an HTTP server

that is behind a firewall, you must use a proxy specifier during boot.
You do not need to specify an IP address for the server that contains
the file. You must specify an IP address for the proxy server, as in the
following example:
http://www.shadow.com/jumpstart/
config.tar&proxy=131.141.6.151

ask Specifies that the installation program prompt you to type the
location of the compressed configuration file after the system boots
and connects to the network.

If you bypass the prompt by pressing Return, the installation

program interactively configures the network parameters. The
installation program then prompts you for the location of the
compressed configuration file. If you bypass the prompt by pressing
Return, the Solaris installation program begins.
dhcp Specifies to use a DHCP server to obtain network installation
information that is needed to boot the system.

If you do not specify to use a DHCP server, the system uses the
/etc/bootparams file or the name service bootparams database.
nowin Specifies not to begin the X program. You do not need to use the X
program to perform a custom JumpStart installation, so you can
reduce the installation time by using the nowin option.

SPARC only – The system checks hardware and system components and your
SPARC based system boots. Booting lasts several minutes.

6. If you did not preconfigure system information in the sysidcfg file, when
prompted, answer the questions about system configuration.

7. Follow the instructions on the screen to install the software.

When the JumpStart program finishes installing the Solaris software, the system
reboots automatically.

104 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 After the installation is finished, installation logs are saved in a file. You can find
the installation logs in the following directories:
■ /var/sadm/system/logs
■ /var/sadm/install/logs

x86: Task Map: Setting Up a System for a

Custom JumpStart Installation
TABLE 7–2 x86: Task Map: Setting Up a System for a Custom JumpStart Installation

Task Description For Instructions

Determine if you need to If the existing operating “x86: fdisk Profile Keyword”
preserve an existing operating system on the system uses the on page 139
system and user data. entire disk, you must preserve
the existing operating system
so it can co-exist with the
Solaris 10 software. This
decision determines how to
specify the fdisk(1M)
keyword in the system’s
profile.

Check if the system is Check the hardware Hardware manufacturer’s

supported. documentation for system documentation
support in the Solaris 10
environment.

Check if the system has Verify that you have planned Chapter 2
enough disk space for the enough space to install the
Solaris software. Solaris software on your
system.

(Optional) Set system You can preconfigure system Chapter 4, “Preconfiguring

parameters. information to avoid being System Configuration
prompted for the information Information (Tasks),” in
during the installation or Solaris 10 Installation Guide:
upgrade. Network-Based Installations

Prepare the system for custom Create and validate a rules Chapter 4
JumpStart installation. file and profile files.

(Optional) Prepare optional If you are using begin scripts, Chapter 5 and Chapter 6
custom JumpStart features. finish scripts, or other
optional features, prepare the
scripts or files.

Chapter 7 • Performing a Custom JumpStart Installation (Tasks) 105

 TABLE 7–2 x86: Task Map: Setting Up a System for a Custom JumpStart Installation
(Continued)
Task Description For Instructions

(Optional) Prepare to install To install a system from a Chapter 7, “Preparing to

the Solaris software from the remote Solaris 10 Operating Install From the Network
network. System for x86 Platforms With CD Media (Tasks),” in
DVD or Solaris 10 Software Solaris 10 Installation Guide:
For x86 Platforms CD image, Network-Based Installations
you need to set up the system
to boot and install from an
install server or a boot server.

(Optional) Prepare for a Set up specifics for a Solaris “To Prepare to Install a Solaris
Solaris Flash archive Flash archive installation. Flash Archive With a Custom
installation. JumpStart Installation”
on page 101

Perform an installation or Boot the system to initiate the “x86: To Perform an

upgrade. installation or upgrade. Installation or Upgrade With
the Custom JumpStart
Program” on page 106

x86: Performing a Custom JumpStart

Installation
During a custom JumpStart installation, the JumpStart program attempts to match the
system that is being installed to the rules in the rules.ok file. The JumpStart
program reads the rules from the first rule through the last rule. A match occurs when
the system that is being installed matches all of the system attributes that are defined
in the rule. As soon as a system matches a rule, the JumpStart program stops reading
the rules.ok file and begins to install the system, based on the matched rule’s
profile.

You can install a Solaris Flash archive with custom JumpStart. For instructions, see “To
Prepare to Install a Solaris Flash Archive With a Custom JumpStart Installation”
on page 101.

▼ x86: To Perform an Installation or Upgrade With

the Custom JumpStart Program
Steps 1. If the system is part of a network, ensure that an Ethernet connector or similar
network adapter is attached to your system.

106 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
2. If you want to install a system that is connected through a tip(1) line, ensure
that your window display is at least 80 columns wide and 24 rows long.
To determine the current dimensions of your tip window, use the stty(1)
command.

3. If you are using a profile diskette, insert the profile diskette into the system’s
diskette drive.

Note – The profile diskette contains a copy of the Solaris 10 Device Configuration
Assistant in addition to profile information. If you are using PXE network boot to
boot the system over the network, you must configure your system so that the
system boots from the network and not from the diskette.

4. If you are using the system’s DVD-ROM or CD-ROM drive to install the Solaris
10 software, insert the Solaris 10 Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD or the
Solaris 10 Software for x86 Platforms - 1 CD in the drive.

5. Decide how to boot the system.

■ If you boot from the Solaris 10 Operating System DVD or the Solaris 10
Software - 1 CD, insert the disc. Your system’s BIOS must support booting from
a DVD or CD.
■ If you boot from the network, use Preboot Execution Environment (PXE)
network boot. The system must support PXE. Enable the system to use PXE by
using the system’s BIOS setup tool or the network adapter’s configuration setup
tool.
■ If you boot from a Diskette – Use the profile diskette that you inserted into the
drive in Step 3 or insert the Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant diskette
into the system’s diskette drive.

x86 only – You can copy the Device Configuration Assistant software to a
diskette from the Solaris 10 Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD or Solaris
10 Software for x86 Platforms - 2 CD by using the procedure in Appendix C,
“Preparing to Boot From the Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant or the
Network (Tasks),” in Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations.

6. If the system is off, turn the system on. If the system is on, reboot the system.
The Device Configuration Assistant identifies the system’s devices.

7. On the Boot Solaris screen, select the device from which to boot the system.
Select DVD, CD, Net, or Disk.

Chapter 7 • Performing a Custom JumpStart Installation (Tasks) 107

 8. At the prompt, perform one of the following:
Select the type of installation you want to perform:

1 Solaris Interactive
2 Custom JumpStart

Enter the number of your choice followed by the <ENTER> key.

If you enter anything else, or if you wait for 30 seconds,

an interactive installation will be started.
To select the custom JumpStart method, perform one of the following actions:

Note – If you do not type 2 or type a boot command within 30 seconds, the Solaris
installation program begins. You can stop the timer by typing any key on the
command line.

■ Type 2 and press Enter.

■ To specify the location of the custom JumpStart configuration files, type the
following command.
b install url:ask dhcp nowin

url Specifies the location of the custom JumpStart files. You can specify a
URL for files that are located in the following places:
■ Local hard disk
file://jumpstart_dir_path/compressed_config_file
■ NFS server
nfs://server_name:IP_address/jumpstart_dir_path/compressed_config _file
■ HTTP server
http://server_name:IP_address/jumpstart_dir_path/ \
compressed_config_file&proxy_info

If you placed a sysidcfg file in the compressed configuration file,

you must specify the IP address of the server that contains the file, as
in the following example:
http://131.141.2.32/jumpstart/config.tar

If you saved the compressed configuration file on an HTTP server

that is behind a firewall, you must use a proxy specifier during boot.
You do not need to specify an IP address for the server that contains
the file. You must specify an IP address for the proxy server, as in the
following example:
http://www.shadow.com/jumpstart/
config.tar&proxy=131.141.6.151

108 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 ask Specifies that the installation program prompt you to type the
location of the compressed configuration file after the system boots
and connects to the network.

If you bypass the prompt by pressing Return, the installation

program interactively configures the network parameters. The
installation program then prompts you for the location of the
compressed configuration file. If you bypass the prompt by pressing
Return, the Solaris installation program begins.
dhcp Specifies to use a DHCP server to obtain network installation
information that is needed to boot the system.

If you do not specify to use a DHCP server, the system uses the
/etc/bootparams file or the name service bootparams database.
nowin Specifies not to begin the X program. You do not need to use the X
program to perform a custom JumpStart installation, so you can
reduce the installation time by using the nowin option.

9. If you did not preconfigure system information in the sysidcfg file, when
prompted, answer the questions about system configuration.

10. Follow the instructions on the screen to install the software.

When the JumpStart program finishes installing the Solaris software, the system
reboots automatically.
After the installation is finished, installation logs are saved in a file. You can find
the installation logs in the following directories:
■ /var/sadm/system/logs
■ /var/sadm/install/logs

Chapter 7 • Performing a Custom JumpStart Installation (Tasks) 109

110 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
CHAPTER 8

Installing With Custom JumpStart

(Examples)

This chapter provides an example of setting up and installing Solaris software on both
SPARC based and x86 based systems by using a custom JumpStart installation.
■ “Sample Site Setup” on page 111
■ “Create an Install Server” on page 113
■ “x86: Create a Boot Server for Marketing Systems” on page 114
■ “Create a JumpStart Directory” on page 115
■ “Share the JumpStart Directory” on page 115
■ “SPARC: Create the Engineering Group’s Profile” on page 115
■ “x86: Create the Marketing Group’s Profile” on page 116
■ “Update the rules File” on page 117
■ “Validate the rules File” on page 117
■ “SPARC: Set Up Engineering Systems to Install From the Network” on page 118
■ “x86: Set Up Marketing Systems to Install From the Network” on page 118
■ “SPARC: Boot the Engineering Systems and Install Solaris 10 Software” on page
119
■ “x86: Boot the Marketing Systems and Install Solaris 10 Software” on page 120

Sample Site Setup

Figure 8–1 shows the site setup for this example.

111
 Engineering Subnet

server-1
(install/boot server)

Marketing Subnet

server-2
(boot server)

FIGURE 8–1 Sample Site Setup

At this sample site, the conditions are as follows:

■ SPARC: The engineering group is located on its own subnet. This group uses
SPARCstation™ systems for software development.
■ x86: The marketing group is located on its own subnet. This group uses x86 based
systems for running word processors, spreadsheets, and other office productivity
tools.
■ The site uses NIS. The Ethernet addresses, IP addresses, and host names of the
systems are preconfigured in the NIS maps. The subnet mask, date and time, and
geographic region for the site are also preconfigured in the NIS maps.

Note – The peripheral devices for the marketing systems are preconfigured in the
sysidcfg file.

■ Both the engineering and marketing systems are to be installed with Solaris 10
software from the network.

112 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
Create an Install Server
Because the groups need to install Solaris 10 software from the network, you make
server-1 an install server for both groups. You use the
setup_install_server(1M) command to copy the images to the server-1 local
disk (in the /export/install directory). Copy the images from the either of the
following media.
■ Solaris 10 Software CDs and the Solaris 10 Languages CD
■ Solaris 10 Operating System DVD

You must copy the image from the disc to an empty directory, in these examples the
sparc_10 directory and the x86_10 directory.
EXAMPLE 8–1 SPARC: Copying the Solaris 10 CDs

Insert the Solaris 10 Software for SPARC Platforms - 1 CD in the CD-ROM drive that is
attached to server-1 and type the following commands:
server-1# mkdir -p /export/install/sparc_10
server-1# cd /CD_mount_point/Solaris_10/Tools
server-1# ./setup_install_server /export/install/sparc_10

Insert the Solaris 10 Software for SPARC Platforms - 2 CD in the CD-ROM drive that is
attached to server-1 and type the following commands:
server-1# cd /CD_mount_point/Solaris_10/Tools
server-1# ./add_to_install_server /export/install/sparc_10

Repeat the previous command for each Solaris 10 Software you want to install.

Insert the SPARC: Solaris 10 Languages for SPARC Platforms CD in the CD-ROM
drive that is attached to server-1 and type the following commands:
server-1# cd /CD_mount_point/Solaris_10/Tools
server-1# ./add_to_install_server /export/install/sparc_10

EXAMPLE 8–2 x86: Copying the Solaris 10 CDs

Insert the Solaris 10 Software for x86 Platforms - 1 CD in the CD-ROM drive that is
attached to server-1 and type the following commands:
server-1# mkdir -p /export/install/x86_10
server-1# cd /CD_mount_point/Solaris_10/Tools
server-1# ./setup_install_server /export/install/x86_10

Insert the Solaris 10 Software for x86 Platforms - 2 CD in the CD-ROM drive that is
attached to server-1 and type the following commands:
server-1# cd /CD_mount_point/Solaris_10/Tools
server-1# ./add_to_install_server /export/install/x86_10

Chapter 8 • Installing With Custom JumpStart (Examples) 113

 EXAMPLE 8–2 x86: Copying the Solaris 10 CDs (Continued)

Repeat the previous command for each Solaris 10 Software you want to install.

Insert the Solaris 10 Languages for x86 Platforms CD in the CD-ROM drive that is
attached to server-1 and type the following commands:
server-1# cd /CD_mount_point/Solaris_10/Tools
server-1# ./add_to_install_server /export/install/x86_10

EXAMPLE 8–3 SPARC: Copying the Solaris 10 DVD

Insert the Solaris 10 Operating System for SPARC Platforms DVD in the DVD-ROM
drive that is attached to server-1 and type the following commands:
server-1# mkdir -p /export/install/sparc_10
server-1# cd /DVD_mount_point/Solaris_10/Tools
server-1# ./setup_install_server /export/install/sparc_10

EXAMPLE 8–4 x86: Copying the Solaris 10 DVD

Insert the Solaris 10 Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD in the DVD-ROM drive
that is attached to server-1 and type the following commands:
server-1# mkdir -p /export/install/x86_10
server-1# cd /DVD_mount_point/Solaris_10/Tools
server-1# ./setup_install_server /export/install/x86_10

x86: Create a Boot Server for Marketing

Systems
Systems cannot boot from an install server on a different subnet, so you make
server-2 a boot server on the marketing group’s subnet. You use the
setup_install_server(1M) command to copy the boot software from the Solaris
10 Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD or the Solaris 10 Software for x86
Platforms - 1 CD. The boot software is copied to the server-2 local disk in the
/export/boot directory.

Choose the media and install the boot software to local disk.
■ If you insert the Solaris 10 Software for x86 Platforms - 1 CD in the CD-ROM drive
that is attached to server-2, type the following command:
server-2# cd /CD_mount_point/Solaris_10/Tools
server-2# ./setup_install_server -b /export/boot
■ If you insert the Solaris 10 Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD in the
DVD-ROM drive that is attached to server-2, type the following command:

114 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 server-2# cd /DVD_mount_point/Solaris_10/Tools
server-2# ./setup_install_server -b /export/boot

In the setup_install_server command, -b specifies that

setup_install_server is to copy the boot information to the directory that is
named /export/boot.

Create a JumpStart Directory

Now that you have the install server and boot server set up, you create a JumpStart
directory on server-1. You can use any system on the network. This directory holds
files that are required for a custom JumpStart installation of Solaris software. You set
up this directory by copying the sample directory from the Solaris 10 Operating
System DVD image or from the Solaris 10 Software - 1 CD image that has been copied
to /export/install:
server-1# mkdir /jumpstart
server-1# cp -r /export/install/sparc_10/Solaris_10/Misc/jumpstart_sample /jumpstart

Share the JumpStart Directory

To make the rules file and profiles accessible to systems on the network, you share
the /jumpstart directory. To enable the sharing of a directory, you add the following
line to the /etc/dfs/dfstab file:
share -F nfs -o ro,anon=0 /jumpstart

Then, at the command line, you type the shareall command:

server-1# shareall

SPARC: Create the Engineering Group’s

Profile
For the engineering systems, you create a file that is named eng_prof in the
/jumpstart directory. The eng_prof file contains the following entries, which
define the Solaris 10 software to be installed on systems in the engineering group:

Chapter 8 • Installing With Custom JumpStart (Examples) 115

 install_type initial_install
system_type standalone
partitioning default
cluster SUNWCprog
filesys any 512 swap

The previous example profile specifies the following installation information.

install_type The installation is to be treated as an initial installation, as
opposed to an upgrade.
system_type The engineering systems are standalone systems.
partitioning The JumpStart software uses default disk partitioning for
installing Solaris software on the engineering systems.
cluster The Developer System Support software group is to be installed.
filesys Each system in the engineering group is to have 512 Mbytes of
swap space.

x86: Create the Marketing Group’s

Profile
For the marketing systems, you create a file that is named marketing_prof in the
/jumpstart directory. The marketing_prof file contains the following entries,
which define the Solaris 10 software to be installed on systems in the marketing group:
install_type initial_install
system_type standalone
partitioning default
cluster SUNWCuser
package SUNWaudio

The previous example profile specifies the following installation information.

install_type The installation is to be treated as an initial installation, as
opposed to an upgrade.
system_type The marketing systems are standalone systems.
partitioning The JumpStart software is to use default disk partitioning for
installing Solaris on the marketing systems.
cluster The End User Solaris Software Group is to be installed.
package The audio demo software package is to be added to each system.

116 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
Update the rules File
Now you must add rules to the rules file. The Solaris installation program uses the
rules to select the correct installation (profile) for each system during a custom
JumpStart installation.

At this site, each department is located on its own subnet and has its own network
address. The engineering department is located on subnet 255.222.43.0. The marketing
department is located on 255.222.44.0. You can use this information to control how the
engineering and marketing systems are installed with the Solaris 10 software. In the
/jumpstart directory, you edit the rules file, delete all of the example rules, and
add the following lines to the file:
network 255.222.43.0 - eng_prof -
network 255.222.44.0 - marketing_prof -

Basically, these rules state that systems on the 255.222.43.0 network are to be installed
with the Solaris 10 software by using the eng_prof profile. The systems on the
255.222.44.0 network are to be installed with the Solaris 10 software by using the
marketing_prof profile.

Note – You can use the sample rules to use a network address to identify the systems
to be installed with the Solaris 10 software by using eng_prof and
marketing_prof, respectively. You can also use host names, memory size, or model
type as the rule keyword. Table 9–1 contains a complete list of keywords you can use
in a rules file.

Validate the rules File

After the rules and profiles are set up, you run the check script to verify that the
files are correct:
server-1# cd /jumpstart
server-1# ./check

If the check script does not find any errors, the script creates the rules.ok file.

Chapter 8 • Installing With Custom JumpStart (Examples) 117

 SPARC: Set Up Engineering Systems to
Install From the Network
After setting up the /jumpstart directory and files, you use the
add_install_client command on the install server, server-1, to set up the
engineering systems to install the Solaris 10 software from the install server.
server-1 is also the boot server for the engineering group’s subnet.
server-1# cd /export/install/sparc_10/Solaris_10/Tools
server-1# ./add_install_client -c server-1:/jumpstart host-eng1 sun4u
server-1# ./add_install_client -c server-1:/jumpstart host-eng2 sun4u

In the add_install_client command, the options that are used have the following
meanings:
-c Specifies the server (server-1) and path (/jumpstart) to the
JumpStart directory.
host-eng1 The name of a system in the engineering group.
host-eng2 The name of another system in the engineering group.
sun4u Specifies the platform group of the systems that use server-1 as an
install server. The platform group is for Ultra 5 systems.

x86: Set Up Marketing Systems to Install

From the Network
Next, you use the add_install_client command on the boot server (server-2).
This command sets up the marketing systems to boot from the boot server and install
the Solaris 10 software from the install server (server-1):
server-2# cd /marketing/boot-dir/Solaris_10/Tools
server-2# ./add_install_client -s server-1:/export/install/x86_10 \
-c server-1:/jumpstart host-mkt1 i86pc
server-2# ./add_install_client -s server-1:/export/install/x86_10 \
-c server-1:/jumpstart host-mkt2 i86pc
server-2# ./add_install_client -d -s server-1:/export/install/x86_10 \
-c server-1:/jumpstart SUNW.i86pc i86pc
server-2# ./add_install_client -c server-1:/jumpstart host-mkt1 sun4u
server-2# ./add_install_client -c server-1:/jumpstart host-mkt2 sun4u

118 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
In the add_install_client command, the options that are used have the following
meanings:
-d Specifies that the client is to use DHCP to obtain the network install
parameters. This option is required for clients to use PXE network
boot to boot from the network. -d is optional for network boot clients
that do not use PXE network boot.
-s Specifies the install server (server-1) and the path to the Solaris 10
software (/export/install/x86_10).
-c Specifies the server (server-1) and path (/jumpstart) to the
JumpStart directory.
host-mkt1 The name of a system in the marketing group.
host-mkt2 The name of another system in the marketing group.
sun4u Specifies the platform group of the systems that use server-1 as an
install server. The platform group is for Ultra 5 systems.
SUNW.i86pc The DHCP class name for all Solaris x86 clients. If you want to
configure all Solaris x86 DHCP clients with a single command, use
this class name.
i86pc Specifies the platform group of the systems that use this boot server.
The platform name represents x86 based systems.

SPARC: Boot the Engineering Systems

and Install Solaris 10 Software
After setting up the servers and files, you can boot the engineering systems by using
the following boot command at the ok (PROM) prompt of each system:
ok boot net - install

The Solaris OS is automatically installed on the engineering group’s systems.

Chapter 8 • Installing With Custom JumpStart (Examples) 119

 x86: Boot the Marketing Systems and
Install Solaris 10 Software
You can boot the system from one of the following:
■ Solaris 10 Software for x86 Platforms - 1 CD
■ Solaris 10 Operating System for x86 Platforms DVD
■ The network by using PXE network boot
■ The profile diskette
■ The Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant diskette

Solaris 10 is automatically installed on the marketing group’s systems.

120 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
CHAPTER 9

Custom JumpStart (Reference)

This chapter lists keywords and values that you can use in the rules file, profiles,
and begin and finish scripts.
■ “Rule Keywords and Values” on page 121
■ “Profile Keywords and Values” on page 125
■ “Custom JumpStart Environment Variables” on page 165
■ “Probe Keywords and Values” on page 167

Rule Keywords and Values

Table 9–1 describes the keywords and values that you can use in the rules file. For
detailed instructions to create a rules file, see “Creating the rules File” on page 56.

TABLE 9–1 Descriptions of Rule Keywords and Values

Keyword Value Matches

any minus sign (-) Anything. The any keyword always

succeeds.

arch processor_type A system’s processor type.

Valid values for processor_type are the following: The uname -p command reports the
■ SPARC: sparc system’s processor type.
■ x86: i386

121
TABLE 9–1 Descriptions of Rule Keywords and Values (Continued)
Keyword Value Matches

disksize actual_disk_name size_range The name and size of a system’s disk in

Mbytes.
actual_disk_name – A disk name in the form
cxtydz, such as c0t3d0 or c0d0, or the special Example:
word rootdisk. If rootdisk is used, the disk to
disksize c0t3d0 250-300
be matched is determined in the following order:
■ SPARC: The disk that contains the preinstalled In the example, the JumpStart program
boot image, which is a new SPARC based attempts to match a system disk that is
system with factory JumpStart installed named c0t3d0. The disk can hold
■ The c0t3d0s0 disk, if the disk exists between 250 and 300 Mbytes of
■ The first available disk that is searched in information.
kernel probe order
Example:
size_range – The size of the disk, which must be
specified as a range of Mbytes (x-x). disksize rootdisk 750-1000

Note – When calculating size_range, remember that In the example, the JumpStart program
a Mbyte equals 1,048,576 bytes. A disk might be attempts to match a disk in the following
advertised as a “535–Mbyte” disk, but the disk order:
might contain only 510 million bytes of disk space. 1. A system disk that contains a
The JumpStart program views the “535–Mbyte” preinstalled boot image
disk as a 510–Mbyte disk because 535,000,000 /
2. The c0t3d0s0 disk, if the disk exists
1,048,576 = 510. A “535–Mbyte” disk does not
3. The first available disk that can hold
match a size_range equal to 530–550.
between 750 Mbytes and 1 Gbyte of
information

domainname actual_domain_name A system’s domain name, which controls

how a name service determines
information.
If you have a system already installed, the
domainname command reports the
system’s domain name.

hostaddress actual_IP_address A system’s IP address.

hostname actual_host_name A system’s host name.

If you have a system that is already
installed, the uname -n command reports
the system’s host name.

122 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
TABLE 9–1 Descriptions of Rule Keywords and Values (Continued)
Keyword Value Matches

installed slice version A disk that has a root (/) file system that
corresponds to a particular version of
slice – A disk slice name in the form cwtxdysz,
Solaris software.
such as c0t3d0s5, or the special words any or
rootdisk. If any is used, the JumpStart program Example:
attempts to match all of the system’s disks in
installed c0t3d0s1 Solaris_10
kernel probe order. If rootdisk is used, the disk
to be matched is determined in the following In the example, the JumpStart program
order: attempts to match a system that has a
■ SPARC: The disk that contains the preinstalled
Solaris root (/) file system on c0t3d0s1.
boot image, which is a new SPARC based
system with factory JumpStart installed
■ The c0t3d0s0 disk, if the disk exists
■ The first available disk that is searched in
kernel probe order

version – A version name or the special words any

or upgrade. If any is used, any Solaris or SunOS
release is matched. If upgrade is used, any Solaris
7 or compatible release that can be upgraded is
matched.
If the JumpStart program finds a Solaris release
but is unable to determine the version, the version
that is returned is SystemV.

karch actual_platform_group A system’s platform group.

Valid values are sun4u, i86pc, and prep. A list of If you have a system that is already
systems and their corresponding platform group is installed, the arch -k command or the
presented in the Solaris 10 Sun Hardware Platform uname -m command reports the system’s
Guide at http://docs.sun.com. platform group.

memsize physical_mem A system’s physical memory size in

Mbytes.
The value must be a range of Mbytes, x-x, or a
single Mbyte value. Example:
memsize 64-128

The example tries to match a system with

a physical memory size between 64 and
128 Mbytes.

If you have a system that is already

installed, the output of the prtconf
command, line 2, reports the system’s
physical memory size.

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 123

TABLE 9–1 Descriptions of Rule Keywords and Values (Continued)
Keyword Value Matches

model actual_platform_name A system’s platform name. See the Solaris

10 Sun Hardware Platform Guide at
http://docs.sun.com for a list of valid
platform names.
To find the platform name of an installed
system, use the uname -i command or
the output of the prtconf command, line
5.
Note – If the actual_platform_name contains
spaces, you must replace spaces with
underscores (_).
Example:
SUNW,Sun_4_50

network network_num A system’s network number, which the

JumpStart program determines by
performing a logical AND between the
system’s IP address and the subnet mask.
Example:
network 192.168.2.0

The example tries to match a system with

a 192.168.2.8 IP address, if the subnet mask
is 255.255.255.0.

osname Solaris_x A version of Solaris software that is

already installed on a system.
Example:

osname Solaris_10

In the example, the JumpStart program

attempts to match a system with the
Solaris 10 OS already installed.

124 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
TABLE 9–1 Descriptions of Rule Keywords and Values (Continued)
Keyword Value Matches

probe probe_keyword A valid probe keyword or a valid custom

probe keyword.
Example:
probe disks

The example returns the size of a system’s

disks in Mbytes and in kernel probe order,
for example, c0t3d0s1, c0t4d0s0, on a
SPARC based system. The JumpStart
program sets the SI_DISKLIST,
SI_DISKSIZES, SI_NUMDISKS, and
SI_TOTALDISK environment variables.

Note – The probe keyword is unique in

that the keyword does not attempt to
match an attribute and run a profile. The
probe keyword returns a value.
Consequently, you cannot specify begin
scripts, profiles, and finish scripts with the
probe rule keyword.

Probe keywords are described in

Chapter 6.

totaldisk size_range The total disk space on a system in

Mbytes. The total disk space includes all
The value must be specified as a range of Mbytes
the operational disks that are attached to a
(x-x).
system.
Note – When calculating size_range, remember that
Example:
one Mbyte equals 1,048,576 bytes. A disk might be
advertised as a “535–Mbyte” disk, but the disk totaldisk 300-500
might have only 510 million bytes of disk space.
The JumpStart program views the “535–Mbyte” In the example, the JumpStart program
disk as a 510–Mbyte disk because 535,000,000 / tries to match a system with a total disk
1,048,576 = 510. A “535–Mbyte” disk does not space between 300 and 500 Mbytes.
match a size_range equal to 530–550.

Profile Keywords and Values

This section describes the profile keywords and values that you can use in a profile.
For detailed instructions to create a profile, see “Creating a Profile” on page 59.

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 125

 Profile Keywords Quick Reference
Table 9–2 provides a quick way to determine which keywords you can use, based on
your installation scenario. Unless otherwise noted in the keyword descriptions, the
keyword can only be used with the initial installation option.

TABLE 9–2 Profile Keywords Overview

Installation Scenarios

Standalone
System Upgrade With Disk
Standalone System (Networked) or Space
Profile Keyword (Nonnetworked) Server OS Server Upgrade Reallocation

archive_location ✓ ✓
(installing Solaris Flash
archives)

backup_media ✓

boot_device ✓ ✓ ✓

bootenv createbe ✓ ✓ ✓

client_arch ✓

client_root ✓

client_swap ✓

cluster (adding software ✓ ✓ ✓

groups)

cluster (adding or deleting ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

clusters)

dontuse ✓ ✓ ✓

fdisk (x86 only) ✓ ✓ ✓

filesys (mounting remote ✓ ✓

file systems)

filesys (creating local file ✓ ✓ ✓

systems)

filesys (creating mirrored ✓ ✓ ✓

file systems)

forced_deployment ✓ ✓
(installing Solaris Flash
differential archives)

geo ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

install_type ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

126 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
TABLE 9–2 Profile Keywords Overview (Continued)
Installation Scenarios

Standalone
System Upgrade With Disk
Standalone System (Networked) or Space
Profile Keyword (Nonnetworked) Server OS Server Upgrade Reallocation

layout_constraint ✓

local_customization ✓ ✓
(installing Solaris Flash
archives)

locale ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

metadb (creating state ✓ ✓ ✓

database replicas)

no_master_check ✓ ✓
(installing Solaris Flash
differential archives)

no_content_check ✓ ✓
(installing Solaris Flash
differential archives)

num_clients ✓

package ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

partitioning ✓ ✓ ✓

patch ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

root_device ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

system_type ✓ ✓ ✓

usedisk ✓ ✓ ✓

Profile Keyword Descriptions and Examples

archive_location Keyword
archive_location retrieval_type location

retrieval_type The values of retrieval_type and location depend on where the Solaris
Flash archive is stored. The following sections contain the values you
can use for retrieval_type and location and examples of how to use the
archive_location keyword.
■ “Archive Stored on an NFS Server” on page 128

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 127

 ■ “Archive Stored on an HTTP or HTTPS Server” on page 128
■ “Archive Stored on an FTP Server” on page 129
■ “Archive Stored on a Local Tape” on page 130
■ “Archive Stored on a Local Device” on page 131
■ “Archive Stored on a Local File” on page 132
location Specifics for locations are noted in the following sections.

Archive Stored on an NFS Server

If the archive is stored on an NFS server, use the following syntax for the
archive_location keyword.
archive_location nfs server_name:/path/filename retry n

server_name The name of the server where you stored the archive.
path The location of the archive to be retrieved from the specified server. If
the path contains $HOST, the Solaris Flash installation utilities replace
$HOST with the name of the clone system that you are installing.
filename The name of the Solaris Flash archive file.
retry n An optional keyword. n is the maximum number of times the Solaris
Flash utilities attempt to mount the archive.

EXAMPLE 9–1 Archive Stored on an NFS Server

archive_location nfs golden:/archives/usrarchive

archive_location nfs://golden/archives/usrarchive

Archive Stored on an HTTP or HTTPS Server

If the archive is stored on an HTTP server, use the following syntax for the
archive_location keyword.
archive_location http://server_name:port/path/filename optional_keywords

If the archive is stored on an HTTPS server, use the following syntax for the
archive_location keyword.
archive_location https://server_name:port/path/filename optional_keywords

server_name The name of the server where you stored the archive.
port An optional port. port can be a port number or the name of a TCP
service that has a port number that is determined at runtime.

If you do not specify a port, the Solaris Flash installation utilities

use the default HTTP port number, 80.

128 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 path The location of the archive to be retrieved from the specified
server. If the path contains $HOST, the Solaris Flash installation
utilities replace $HOST with the name of the clone system that
you are installing.
filename The name of the Solaris Flash archive file.
optional_keywords The optional keywords that you can specify when you retrieve a
Solaris Flash archive from an HTTP server.

TABLE 9–3 Optional Keywords to Use With archive_location HTTP

Keyword Value Definition

auth basic user_name password If the archive is located on an HTTP server that is password protected, you
must include the user name and password that you need to access the HTTP
server in the profile file.
Note – The use of this authentication method in a profile that is intended for use
with custom JumpStart is risky. Unauthorized users might have access to the
profile file that contains the password.

timeout min The timeout keyword enables you to specify, in minutes, the maximum length
of time that is allowed to pass without receipt of data from the HTTP server. If
a timeout occurs, the connection is closed, reopened, and resumed. If you
specify a timeout value of 0 (zero), the connection is not reopened.
■ If a timeout reconnection occurs, the Solaris Flash installation utilities
attempt to resume the installation at the last known position in the archive.
If the Solaris Flash installation utilities cannot resume the installation at the
last known position, the retrieval restarts from the beginning of the archive
and the data that was retrieved prior to the timeout is discarded.
■ If a timeout reconnection occurs while a package is being installed, the
package is retried from the beginning of the package and the data that was
retrieved prior to the timeout is discarded.

proxy host:port The proxy keyword enables you to specify a proxy host and proxy port. You
can use a proxy host to retrieve a Solaris Flash archive from the other side of a
firewall. You must supply a proxy port when you specify the proxy keyword.

EXAMPLE 9–2 Archive Stored on a HTTP or HTTPS Server

archive_location http://silver/archives/usrarchive.flar timeout 5

Example of the auth basic user_name password keyword:

archive_location http://silver/archives/usrarchive.flar timeout 5 user1 secret

Archive Stored on an FTP Server

If the archive is stored on an FTP server, use the following syntax for the
archive_location keyword.
archive_location ftp://user_name:password@server_name:port/path/filename optional_keywords

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 129

 user_name:password The user name and password that you need to access the FTP
server in the profile file.
server_name The name of the server where you stored the archive.
port A is an optional port. port can be a port number or the name of
a TCP service that has a port number that is determined at
runtime.

If you do not specify a port, the Solaris Flash installation

utilities use the default FTP port number, 21.
path The location of the archive to be retrieved from the specified
server. If the path contains $HOST, the Solaris Flash installation
utilities replace $HOST with the name of the clone system that
you are installing.
filename The name of the Solaris Flash archive file.
optional_keywords The optional keywords that you can specify when you retrieve
a Solaris Flash archive from an FTP server.

TABLE 9–4 Optional Keywords to Use With archive_location FTP

Keyword Value Definition

timeout min The timeout keyword enables you to specify, in minutes, the maximum length
of time that is allowed to pass without receipt of data from the HTTP server. If
a timeout occurs, the connection is closed, reopened, and resumed. If you
specify a timeout value of 0 (zero), the connection is not reopened.
■ If a timeout reconnection occurs, the Solaris Flash installation utilities
attempt to resume the installation at the last known position in the archive.
If the Solaris Flash installation utilities cannot resume the installation at the
last known position, the retrieval restarts from the beginning of the archive
and the data that was retrieved prior to the timeout is discarded.
■ If a timeout reconnection occurs while a package is being installed, the
package is retried from the beginning of the package and the data that was
retrieved prior to the timeout is discarded.

proxy host:port The proxy keyword enables you to specify a proxy host and proxy port. You
can use a proxy host to retrieve a Solaris Flash archive from the other side of a
firewall. You must supply a proxy port when you specify the proxy keyword.

EXAMPLE 9–3 Archive Stored on an FTP Server

archive_location ftp://user1:secret@silver/archives/usrarchive.flar timeout 5

Archive Stored on a Local Tape

If the archive is stored on a tape, use the following syntax for the
archive_location keyword.

130 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
archive_location local_tape device position

device The name of the tape drive where you stored the Solaris Flash archive. If
the device name is a canonical path, the Solaris Flash installation utilities
retrieve the archive from the path to the device node. If you supply a
device name that is not a canonical path, the Solaris Flash installation
utilities add /dev/rmt/ to the path.
position Designates the place on the tape drive where you saved the archive. If you
do not supply a position, the Solaris Flash installation utilities retrieve the
archive from the current position on the tape drive. By specifying a
position, you can place a begin script or a sysidcfg file on the tape drive
before the archive.

EXAMPLE 9–4 Archive Stored on a Local Tape

archive_location local_tape /dev/rmt/0n 5

archive_location local_tape 0n 5

Archive Stored on a Local Device

You can retrieve a Solaris Flash archive from a local device if you stored the Solaris
Flash archive on a file system-oriented, random-access device, such as a diskette or a
DVD. Use the following syntax for the archive_location keyword.

Note – You can retrieve an archive from stream-oriented devices, such as tape, by using
the syntax for local tape.

archive_location local_device device path/filename file_system_type

device The name of the drive where you stored the Solaris Flash archive.
If the device name is a canonical path, the device is mounted
directly. If you supply a device name that is not a canonical path,
the Solaris Flash installation utilities add /dev/dsk/ to the path.
path The path to the Solaris Flash archive, relative to the root of the file
system on the device you specified. If the path contains $HOST, the
Solaris Flash installation utilities replace $HOST with the name of
the clone system that you are installing.
filename The name of the Solaris Flash archive file.
file_system_type Specifies the type of file system on the device. If you do not supply
a file system type, the Solaris Flash installation utilities attempt to
mount a UFS file system. If the UFS mount fails, the Solaris Flash
installation utilities attempt to mount an HSFS file system.

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 131

 EXAMPLE 9–5 Archive Stored on a Local Device

To retrieve an archive from a local hard drive that is formatted as a UFS file system,
use the following command:
archive_location local_device c0t0d0s0 /archives/$HOST

To retrieve an archive from a local CD-ROM that has an HSFS file system, use the
following command:
archive_location local_device c0t0d0s0 /archives/usrarchive

Archive Stored on a Local File

You can retrieve an archive that you stored in the miniroot from which you booted the
clone system as a local file. When you perform a custom JumpStart installation, you
boot the system from a DVD, CD, or an NFS-based miniroot. The installation software
is loaded and run from this miniroot. Therefore, a Solaris Flash archive that you stored
in the DVD, CD, or NFS-based miniroot is accessible as a local file. Use the following
syntax for the archive_location keyword.
archive_location local_file path/filename

path The location of the archive. The path must be accessible to the system as a
local file while the system is booted from the Solaris 10 Software - 1 CD or
from the Solaris 10 Operating System DVD. The system cannot access
/net or any other automounted directory when it is booted from the
Solaris 10 Software - 1 CD or from the Solaris 10 Operating System DVD.
filename The name of the Solaris Flash archive file.

EXAMPLE 9–6 Archive Stored on a Local File

archive_location local_file /archives/usrarchive

backup_media Profile Keyword

backup_media type path

Note – You can use backup_media only with the upgrade option when disk space
reallocation is required.

backup_media defines the media that is to be used to back up file systems if space
needs to be reallocated during an upgrade because of insufficient space. If multiple
tapes or diskettes are required for the backup, you are prompted to insert tapes or
diskettes during the upgrade.

132 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
Valid type Value Valid path Value Specification

local_tape /dev/rmt/n A local tape drive on the system that is being

upgraded. path must be the character (raw)
device path for the tape drive. n is the number
of the tape drive.

local_diskette /dev/rdisketten A local diskette drive on the system that is

being upgraded. path must be the character
(raw) device path for the diskette drive. n is the
number of the diskette drive.
Diskettes that you use for the backup must be
formatted.

local_filesystem /dev/dsk/cwtxdysz A local file system on the system that is being

upgraded. You cannot specify a local file system
/file_system
that is being changed by the upgrade. path can
be a block device path for a disk slice. For
example, the tx in /dev/dsk/cwtxdysz might
not be needed. Or, path can be the absolute path
to a file system that is mounted by the
/etc/vfstab file.

remote_filesystem host:/file_system An NFS file system on a remote system. path

must include the name or IP address of the
remote system, host, and the absolute path to
the NFS file system, file_system. The NFS file
system must have read/write access.

remote_system user@host:/directory A directory on a remote system that can be

reached by a remote shell, rsh. The system that
is being upgraded must have access to the
remote system through the remote system’s
.rhosts file. path must include the name of the
remote system host and the absolute path to the
directory directory. If a user login ID user is not
specified, root is used by default.

EXAMPLE 9–7 backup_media Profile Keyword

backup_media local_tape /dev/rmt/0

backup_media local_diskette /dev/rdiskette1

backup_media local_filesystem /dev/dsk/c0t3d0s4

backup_media local_filesystem /export

backup_media remote_filesystem system1:/export/temp

backup_media remote_system user1@system1:/export/temp

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 133

 boot_device Profile Keyword
boot_device device eeprom

boot_device designates the device where the JumpStart program is to install the
root (/) file system and the system’s boot device. boot_device must match any
filesys keywords that specify the root (/) file system and the root_device
keyword.

If you do not specify the boot_device keyword in a profile, the following

boot_device keyword is specified by default during the installation:
boot_device any update

device Use one of the following values.

SPARC: cwtxdysz or cxdysz The disk slice where the JumpStart
program places the root (/) file system, for
example, c0t0d0s0.
x86: cwtxdy or cxdy The disk where the JumpStart program
places the root (/) file system, for example,
c0d0.
existing The JumpStart program places the root (/)
file system on the system’s existing boot
device.
any The JumpStart program chooses where to
place the root (/) file system. The
JumpStart program attempts to use the
system’s existing boot device. The
JumpStart program might choose a
different boot device if necessary.
eeprom Choose to update or preserve the system’s EEPROM.

The eeprom value enables you to update the system’s EEPROM if you change
the system’s current boot device. By updating the system’s EEPROM, the
system can automatically boot from the new boot device.

Note – x86: You must specify the preserve value.

update The JumpStart program updates the system’s EEPROM to the

specified boot device so that the installed system
automatically boots from it.
preserve The boot device value in the system’s EEPROM is not
changed. If you specify a new boot device without changing
the system’s EEPROM, you need to change the system’s

134 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 EEPROM manually so it can automatically boot from the new
boot device.

EXAMPLE 9–8 boot_device Profile Keyword

boot_device c0t0d0s2 update

bootenv createbe Profile Keyword

bootenv createbe bename new_BE_name filesystem mountpoint:device:fs_options
[filesystem...]

bootenv createbe keyword enables you to quickly create an empty-and-inactive

boot environment at the same time you are installing the Solaris OS. At the least, you
must create the root (/) file system. The slices are reserved for the file systems
specified, but no file systems are copied. The boot environment is named, but not
actually created until installed with a Solaris Flash archive. When the empty boot
environment is installed with an archive, file systems are installed on the reserved
slices. The following lists the values for bename and filesystem.
bename new_BE_name
bename specifies the name of the new boot environment to be created.
new_BE_name can be no longer than 30 characters, can contain only alphanumeric
characters, and can contain no multibyte characters. The name must be unique on
the system.
filesystem mountpoint:device:fs_options
filesystem determines the type and number of file systems that are to be created
in the new boot environment. At least one slice that contains the root (/) file system
must be defined. File systems can be on the same disk or spread across multiple
disks.
■ mountpoint can be any valid mount point or – (hyphen), indicating a swap slice.
■ device must be available when the operating system that is being installed is first
booted. The device has no relation to JumpStart special storage devices such as
free. The device cannot be a Solaris Volume Manager volume or Veritas Volume
Manager volume. device is the name of a disk device, of the form
/dev/dsk/cwtxdysz.
■ fs_options can be one of the following:
■ ufs, which indicates a UFS file system.
■ swap, which indicates a swap file system. The swap mount point must be a –
(hyphen).

For a profile example and background about using this keyword, see the following
references:

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 135

 For an example of a profile Example 4–11

For background about using Solaris Live Chapter 4, “Solaris Live Upgrade (Overview),”
Upgrade that creates, upgrades, and activates in Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Solaris Live
inactive boot environments Upgrade and Upgrade Planning

For background about using a Solaris Flash Chapter 1, “Solaris Flash (Overview),” in
archive Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Solaris Flash
Archives (Creation and Installation)

client_arch Profile Keyword

client_arch karch_value ...

client_arch specifies that the operating system server is to support a different

platform group than the server uses. If you do not specify client_arch in the
profile, any diskless client that uses the operating system server must contain the same
platform group as the server. You must specify each platform group that you want the
operating system server to support.

Valid values for karch_value are sun4u and i86pc. For a detailed list of platform
names and various systems, see Solaris 10 Sun Hardware Platform Guide at
http://docs.sun.com.

Note – You can use client_arch only when system_type is specified as server.

client_root Profile Keyword

client_root root_size

client_root defines the amount of root space, root_size in Mbytes, to allocate for
each client. If you do not specify client_root in a server’s profile, the installation
software allocates 15 Mbytes of root space per client. The size of the client root area is
used in combination with the num_clients keyword to determine how much space
to reserve for the /export/root file system.

Note – You can use client_root only when system_type is specified as server.

client_swap Profile Keyword

client_swap swap_size

client_swap defines the amount of swap space, swap_size in Mbytes, to allocate for
each diskless client. If you do not specify client_swap in the profile, 32 Mbytes of
swap space is allocated by default.

136 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
Note – You can use client_swap only when system_type is specified as server.

EXAMPLE 9–9 client_swap Profile Keyword

The following example specifies that each diskless client is to have a swap space of 64
Mbytes.
client_swap 64

How the Size of swap Is Determined

If a profile does not specify the size of swap, the JumpStart program determines the
size of the swap space, based on the system’s physical memory. Table 9–5 shows how
the size of swap is determined during a custom JumpStart installation.

TABLE 9–5 Determining swap Size

Physical Memory (in Mbytes) Swap Space (in Mbytes)

16–64 32

64–128 64

128–512 128

Greater than 512 256

The JumpStart program makes the size of swap no more than 20 percent of the disk
where swap is located. The allocation is different if the disk contains free space after
laying out the other file systems. If free space exists, the JumpStart program allocates
the free space to swap, and if possible, allocates the amount that is shown in Table 9–5.

Note – Physical memory plus swap space must total a minimum of 32 Mbytes.

cluster Profile Keyword (Adding Software Groups)

cluster group_name

cluster designates the software group to add to the system. The group_name for each
software group is listed in the following table.

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 137

 Software Group group_name

Reduced Network Support Software SUNWCrnet

Group

Core System Support Software Group SUNWCreq

End User Solaris Software Group SUNWCuser

Developer Solaris Software Group SUNWCprog

Entire Solaris Software Group SUNWCall

Entire Solaris Software Group Plus SUNWCXall

OEM Support

The following limitations apply:

■ You can specify only one software group in a profile.
■ The software group must be specified before other cluster and package entries.
■ If you do not specify a software group with cluster in the profile, the end–user
software group, SUNWCuser, is installed on the system.

For more information about software groups, see “Disk Space Recommendations for
Software Groups” on page 27.

cluster Profile Keyword (Adding or Deleting Clusters)

cluster cluster_name add_delete_switch

cluster designates whether a cluster is to be added or deleted from the software

group that is to be installed on the system.
cluster_name The name of the cluster that must be in the form SUNWCname.
add_delete_switch An optional keyword that indicates whether to add or delete the
cluster that is specified. Use the value add or delete. If you do
not specify add or delete, add is used by default.

When you use cluster during an upgrade, the following conditions apply:
■ All clusters that are already on the system are automatically upgraded.
■ If you specify cluster_name add, and cluster_name is not installed on the system, the
cluster is installed.
■ If you specify cluster_name delete, and cluster_name is installed on the system, the
package is deleted before the upgrade begins.

138 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
dontuse Profile Keyword
dontuse disk_name ...

By default, the JumpStart program uses all of the operational disks on the system
when partitioning default is specified. dontuse designates one or more disks
that you do not want the JumpStart program to use. disk_name must be specified in the
form cxtydzor cydz, for example, c0t0d0.

Note – You cannot specify the dontuse keyword and the usedisk keyword in the
same profile.

x86: fdisk Profile Keyword

fdisk disk_name type size

fdisk defines how the fdisk partitions are set up on an x86 based system. You can
specify fdisk more than once. When fdisk partitions an x86 based system, the
following occurs:
■ All fdisk partitions on the disk are preserved unless you delete the partitions
with the fdisk keyword by assigning size the value of delete or 0. Also, all
existing fdisk partitions are deleted when size is set to all.
■ A Solaris fdisk partition that contains a root (/) file system is always designated
as the active partition on the disk.

Note – The system boots from the active partition by default.

■ If the fdisk keyword is not specified in a profile, the following fdisk keyword is
used by default during the installation.
fdisk all solaris maxfree
■ fdisk entries are processed in the order in which the entries are listed in the
profile.
disk_name Use the following values to specify where the fdisk partition is to be
created or deleted:
■ cxtydz or cydz – A specific disk, for example, c0t3d0.
■ rootdisk – The variable that contains the value of the system’s root
disk, which is determined by the JumpStart program as described in
“How the System’s Root Disk Is Determined” on page 163.
■ all – All the selected disks.

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 139

 type Use the following values to specify the type of fdisk partition that is to
be created or deleted on the specified disk:
■ solaris – A Solaris fdisk partition (SUNIXOS fdisk type).
■ dosprimary – An alias for primary DOS fdisk partitions, not for
fdisk partitions that are extended or reserved for data DOS. When
you delete fdisk partitions by assigning size the value delete,
dosprimary is an alias for the DOSHUGE, DOSOS12, and
DOSOS16 fdisk types. When you create an fdisk partition,
dosprimary is an alias for the DOSHUGE fdisk partition.
■ DDD – An integer fdisk partition. DDD is an integer between 1 and
255 inclusive.

Note – You can specify this value only if size is delete.

■ 0xHH – A hexadecimal fdisk partition. HH is a hexadecimal

number between 01 and FF.

Note – You can specify this value only if size is delete.

The following table shows the integer and hexadecimal numbers for
some of the fdisk types.

fdisk Type DDD HH

DOSOS12 1 01

PCIXOS 2 02

DOSOS16 4 04

EXTDOS 5 05

DOSHUGE 6 06

DOSDATA 86 56

OTHEROS 98 62

UNIXOS 99 63

size Use one of the following values:

140 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 ■ DDD – An fdisk partition of size DDD in Mbytes is created on the
specified disk. DDD must be an integer, and the JumpStart program
automatically rounds the number up to the nearest cylinder
boundary. Specifying a value of 0 is the same as specifying delete.
■ all – An fdisk partition is created on the entire disk. All existing
fdisk partitions are deleted.

x86 only – The all value can be specified only if type is solaris.

■ maxfree – An fdisk partition is created in the largest contiguous

free space on the specified disk. If an fdisk partition of the specified
type already exists on the disk, the existing fdisk partition is used. A
new fdisk partition is not created on the disk.

x86 only – The disk must contain at least one unused fdisk partition.
Also, the disk must have free space or the installation fails. The
maxfree value can be specified only if type is solaris or
dosprimary.

■ delete – All fdisk partitions of the specified type are deleted on

the specified disk.

filesys Profile Keyword (Mounting Remote File

Systems)
filesys server:path server_address mount_pt_name mount_options

By using filesys with the listed values, the JumpStart program sets up the installed
system to automatically mount remote file systems when the system boots. You can
specify filesys more than once.
server The name of the server where the remote file system is located,
followed by a colon.
path The remote file system’s mount-point name. For example, /usr or
/export/home
server_address The IP address of the server that is specified in server:path. If a name
service is not running on the network, the server_address value can be
used to populate the /etc/hosts file with the server’s host name

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 141

 and IP address. If you are not specifying the server’s IP address, you
must specify a minus sign (-). For example, if you have a name
service that is running on the network, you do not need to specify
the server’s IP address.
mount_pt_name The name of the mount point on which the remote file system is to
be mounted.
mount_options One or more mount options, which is the same as the -o option of
the mount(1M) command. The mount options are added to the
/etc/vfstab entry for the specified mount_pt_name.

Note – If you need to specify more than one mount option, the mount
options must be separated by commas and no spaces (ro,quota for
example).

EXAMPLE 9–10 filsys Profile Keyword

filesys sherlock:/export/home/user2 - /home

filesys Profile Keyword (Creating Local File Systems)

filesys slice size file_system optional_parameters

By using filesys with the values that are listed, the JumpStart program creates local
file systems during the installation. You can specify filesys more than once.
slice Use one of the following values:
any The JumpStart program places the file
system on any disk.

Note – You cannot specify any when

size is existing, all, free,
start:size, or ignore.

cwtxdysz or cxdysz The disk slice where the JumpStart

program places the file system, for
example, c0t0d0s0 or c0d0s0.
rootdisk.sn The variable that contains the value
for the system’s root disk, which is
determined by the JumpStart program
as described in “How the System’s
Root Disk Is Determined” on page

142 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 163. The sn suffix indicates a specific
slice on the disk.
size Use one of the following values:
num The size of the file system is set to num in Mbytes.
existing The current size of the existing file system is used.

Note – When you use the existing value, you can

change the name of an existing slice by specifying
file_system as a different mount_pt_name.

auto The size of the file system is automatically

determined, depending on the software that is
selected.
all The specified slice uses the entire disk for the file
system. When you specify the all value, no other
file systems can be placed on the specified disk.
free The remaining unused space on the disk is used for
the file system.

Note – If free is used as the value to filesys, the

filesys entry must be the last entry in a profile.

start:size The file system is explicitly partitioned. start is the

cylinder where the slice begins. size is the number
of cylinders for the slice.
file_system The file_system value is optional and used when slice is specified
as any or cwtxdysz. If file_system is not specified, unnamed is
set by default. If unnamed is set, you cannot specify the
optional_parameters value. Use one of the following values:
mount_pt_name The file system’s mount-point name, for
example, /var.
swap The specified slice is used as swap.
overlap The specified slice is defined as a
representation of a disk region. The VTOC
value is V_BACKUP. By default, slice 2 is an
overlap slice that is a representation of the
whole disk.

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 143

 Note – You can specify overlap only when
size is existing, all, or start:size.

unnamed The specified slice is defined as a raw slice,

so slice does not have a mount-point name.
If you do not specify file_system, unnamed is
used by default.
ignore The specified slice is not used or recognized
by the JumpStart program. You can use this
option to specify that you want a file system
to be ignored on a disk during installation.
The JumpStart program creates a new file
system on the same disk with the same
name. You can use ignore only when
partitioning existing is specified.
optional_parameters Use one of the following values:
preserve The file system on the specified slice is
preserved.

Note – preserve can be specified only when

size is existing and slice is cwtxdysz.

mount_options One or more mount options, which is the

same as the -o option of the mount(1M)
command. The mount options are added to
the /etc/vfstab entry for the specified
mount_pt_name.

Note – If you need to specify more than one

mount option, the mount options must be
separated by commas and no space
(ro,quota, for example).

filesys Profile Keyword (Creating RAID-1 Volumes)

filesys mirror[:name]slice [slice] size file_system optional_parameters

144 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
By using the filesys mirror keywords with the values that are listed, the
JumpStart program creates the RAID-1 and RAID-0 volumes that are necessary to
create a mirrored file system. You can specify filesys mirror more than once to
create RAID-1 volumes (mirrors) for different file systems.

Note – The filesys mirror keyword is only supported for initial installations.

name This optional keyword enables you to name the RAID-1 volume
(mirror). Mirror names must start with the letter “d”, followed
by a number between 0 and 127, for example, d100. If you do
not specify a mirror name, the custom JumpStart program
assigns a mirror name for you. For guidelines about how to
name mirrors, see “RAID Volume Name Requirements and
Guidelines for Custom JumpStart and Solaris Live Upgrade”
on page 182.
slice This value specifies the disk slice where the custom JumpStart
program places the file system you want to duplicate. The slice
value must follow the format cwtxdysz, for example c0t0d0s0
or c0t0d0s5. The custom JumpStart program creates a RAID-0
volume (single-slice concatenation) on the slice, and creates a
RAID-1 volume to mirror the concatenation. You can specify up
to two slices for two RAID-0 volumes.
size This value specifies the size, in Mbytes, of the file system.
file_system This value specifies the file system that you are duplicating.
The custom JumpStart program creates the RAID-1 volume
from the slices that are specified and mounts the RAID-1
volume on the specified file system. In addition to critical file
systems, such as root (/), /usr, and /var, you can also specify
swap as the file system.
optional_parameters One or more mount options, which is the same as the -o option
of the mount(1M) command. The mount options are added to
the /etc/vfstab entry for the specified file_system. If you
need to specify more than one mount option, the mount options
must be separated by commas and no spaces, for example,
ro,quota.

For more information about creating mirrored file systems during your installation,
see Chapter 10.

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 145

 forced_deployment Profile Keyword (Installing Solaris
Flash Differential Archives)
forced_deployment

forced_deployment forces the installation of a Solaris Flash differential archive

onto a clone system that is different than the software expects.

Caution – If you use forced_deployment, all new files are deleted to bring the clone
system to the expected state. If you are not certain that you want files deleted, use the
default, which protects new files by stopping the installation.

geo Profile Keyword

geo locale

geo designates the regional locale or locales that you want to install on a system or to
add when upgrading a system. Values you can specify for locale are listed in the
following table.

Value Description

N_Africa Northern Africa, including Egypt

C_America Central America, including Costa Rica, El Salvador, Guatemala,

Mexico, Nicaragua, Panama

N_America North America, including Canada, United States

S_America South America, including Argentina, Bolivia, Brazil, Chile, Colombia,

Ecuador, Paraguay, Peru, Uruguay, Venezuela

Asia Asia, including Japan, Republic of Korea, People’s Republic of China,

Taiwan, Thailand

Ausi Australasia, including Australia, New Zealand

C_Europe Central Europe, including Austria, Czech Republic, Germany,

Hungary, Poland, Slovakia, Switzerland

E_Europe Eastern Europe, including Albania, Bosnia, Bulgaria, Croatia, Estonia,

Latvia, Lithuania, Macedonia, Romania, Russia, Serbia, Slovenia,
Turkey

N_Europe Northern Europe, including Denmark, Finland, Iceland, Norway,

Sweden

S_Europe Southern Europe, including Greece, Italy, Portugal, Spain

146 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
Value Description

W_Europe Western Europe, including Belgium, France, Great Britain, Ireland,

Netherlands

M_East Middle East, including Israel

A complete list of the component locale values that compose each regional locale that
is listed previously is presented in International Language Environments Guide.

Note – You can specify a geo keyword for each locale you need to add to a system.

install_type Profile Keyword

install_type initial_upgrade_flash_switch

install_type defines whether to erase and install a new Solaris OS on a system,

upgrade the existing Solaris OS on a system, or install a Solaris Flash archive on the
system.

Note – You must specify install_type in a profile, and install_type must be the
first profile keyword in every profile.

You must use one of the following options for the initial_upgrade_flash_switch:
initial_install Specifies to perform an initial installation of the Solaris OS
upgrade Specifies to perform an upgrade of the Solaris OS
flash_install Specifies to install a Solaris Flash archive that overwrites all
files
flash_update Specifies to install a Solaris Flash differential archive that
overwrites only the files that are specified

Note – Some profile keywords can only be used with the initial_install option.
Some profile keywords can only be used with the upgrade option. Some profile
keywords can only be used with the flash_install option.

layout_constraint Profile Keyword

layout_constraint slice constraint minimum_size

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 147

 Note – You can use layout_constraint only for the upgrade option when you need
to reallocate disk space.

layout_constraint designates the constraint auto-layout has on a file system if

auto-layout needs to reallocate space during an upgrade because of space problems.

Limitation Description

If you do not specify the The JumpStart program lays out the disk as follows:
layout_constraint ■ File systems that require more space for the upgrade are
keyword marked changeable.
■ File systems that are on the same disk as the file system
that requires more space and that are mounted by the
/etc/vfstab file are marked changeable.
■ Remaining file systems are marked fixed because
auto-layout cannot change the file systems.

If you specify one or more The JumpStart program lays out the disk as follows:
layout_constraint ■ File systems that require more space for the upgrade are
keywords marked changeable.
■ File systems for which you specified a
layout_constraint keyword are marked with the
specified constraint.
■ The remaining file systems are marked fixed.

If the file system is not marked You cannot change the constraint on file systems that require
changeable more space for the upgrade because the file systems must be
marked changeable. You can use the layout_constraint
keyword to change the minimum_size values on file systems
that require more space for the upgrade.

If file systems require more To help auto-layout reallocate space, select more file systems
space for upgrade to be changeable or movable, especially those file systems that
are located on the same disks as the file systems that require
more space for the upgrade.

slice Specifies the file system’s disk slice on which to specify the
constraint. You must specify the system’s disk slice in the form
cwtxdysz or cxdysz.
constraint Use one of the following constraints for the specified file system:
changeable Auto-layout can move the file system to another
location and it can change the file system size. The
changeable constraint can only be specified on

148 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 file systems that are mounted by the
/etc/vfstab file. You can change the file
system’s size by specifying the minimum_size
value.

When you mark a file system as changeable and

minimum_size is not specified, the file system’s
minimum size is set to 10 percent more than the
minimum size that is required. For example, if the
minimum size for a file system is 100 Mbytes, the
changed size is 110 Mbytes. If minimum_size is
specified, any free space that remains, original size
minus minimum size, is used for other file
systems.
movable Auto-layout can move the file system to another
slice on the same disk or different disk. The file
system size remains the same.
available Auto-layout can use all of the space on the file
system to reallocate space. All of the data in the file
system is lost. The available constraint can only
be specified on file systems that are not mounted
by the /etc/vfstab file.
collapse Auto-layout moves and collapses the specified file
system into the parent file system. You can use the
collapse option to reduce the number of file
systems on a system as part of the upgrade. For
example, if a system has the /usr and
/usr/share file systems, collapsing the
/usr/share file system moves the file system
into /usr, the parent file system. You can specify
the collapse constraint only on file systems that
are mounted by the /etc/vfstab file.
minimum_size Specifies the size of the file system after auto-layout reallocates
space. The minimum_size option enables you to change the size of a
file system. The size of the file system might be larger if unallocated
space is added to the file system. But, the size is never less than the
value you specify. The minimum_size value is optional. Use this value
only if you have marked a file system as changeable and the
minimum size cannot be less than what the file system needs for the
existing file system contents.

EXAMPLE 9–11 layout_constraint Profile Keyword

layout_constraint c0t3d0s1 changeable 200

layout_constraint c0t3d0s4 movable

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 149

 EXAMPLE 9–11 layout_constraint Profile Keyword (Continued)

layout_constraint c0t3d1s3 available

layout_constraint c0t2d0s1 collapse

local_customization Profile Keyword (Installing

Solaris Flash Archives)
local_customization local_directory

Before you install a Solaris Flash archive on a clone system, you can create custom
scripts to preserve local configurations on the clone system. The
local_customization keyword designates the directory where you have stored
these scripts. local_directory is the path to the script on the clone system.

For information about predeployment and postdeployment scripts, see “Creating

Customization Scripts” in Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Solaris Flash Archives (Creation
and Installation).

locale Profile Keyword

locale locale_name

Note – You can use locale with both the initial installation and upgrade options.

locale designates the locale packages you want to install or add when upgrading for
the specified locale_name. The locale_name values are the same as those values that are
used for the $LANG environment variable. International Language Environments Guide
contains a list of valid locale values.

When you use the local keyword, consider the following:

■ If you have preconfigured a default locale, the locale is automatically installed. The
English language packages are installed by default.
■ You can specify a locale keyword for each locale you need to add to a system.

metadb Profile Keyword (Creating State Database

Replicas)
metadb slice [size size-in-blocks] [count number-of-replicas]

150 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
The metadb keyword enables you to create Solaris Volume Manager state database
replicas (mediates) during your custom JumpStart installation. You can use the
metadb keyword multiple times in your profile file to create state database replicas on
different disk slices.
slice You must specify the disk slice on which you want the
custom JumpStart program to place the state database
replica. The slice value must follow the format cwtxdysz.
size size-in-blocks The size optional keyword enables you to specify the
size, in blocks, of the state database replica to be created.
If you do not specify a size value, the custom JumpStart
program uses a default size of 8192 blocks for the state
database replica.
count number-of-replicas You can specify the number of state database replicas you
are creating by setting the optional count keyword value
in your profile. If you do not specify a count value, the
custom JumpStart program creates three state database
replicas by default.

For more information about creating Solaris Volume Manager state database replicas
during your installation, see “State Database Replicas Guidelines and Requirements”
on page 180.

no_content_check Profile Keyword (Installing Solaris

Flash Archives)
no_content_check

When installing a clone system with a Solaris Flash differential archive, you can use
the no_content_check keyword to ignore file-by-file validation. File-by-file
validation ensures that the clone system is a duplicate of the master system. Avoid
using this keyword unless you are sure the clone system is a duplicate of the original
master system.

Caution – If you use no_content_check, all new files are deleted to bring the clone
system to the expected state. If you are not certain that you want files deleted, use the
default, which protects new files by stopping the installation.

For information about installing Solaris Flash differential archives, see “To Prepare to
Install a Solaris Flash Archive With a Custom JumpStart Installation” on page 101.

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 151

 no_master_check Profile Keyword (Installing Solaris
Flash Archives)
no_master_check

When installing a clone system with a Solaris Flash differential archive, you can use
the no_master_check keyword to ignore checking the clone system to make sure it
was built from the original master system. Avoid using this keyword unless you are
sure the clone system is a duplicate of the original master system.

For information about installing Solaris Flash differential archives, see “To Prepare to
Install a Solaris Flash Archive With a Custom JumpStart Installation” on page 101.

num_clients Profile Keyword

num_clients client_num

When a server is installed, space is allocated for each diskless client’s root (/) and
swap file systems. num_clients defines the number of diskless clients, client_num,
that a server supports. If you do not specify num_clients in the profile, five diskless
clients are allocated by default.

Note – You can use num_clients only when system_type is specified as server.

package Profile Keyword

package package_name [add [retrieval_type location]| delete]

You can use package with both the initial installation and upgrade options. The
package keyword enables you to do the following:
■ Add a package to the software group from the Solaris distribution that is to be
installed.
■ Add a package to the software group from outside the distribution that is being
installed.
■ Exclude or remove a package from the software group that is to be installed or
upgraded.
■ Add a package from outside the distribution that is being installed when installing
a Solaris Flash archive.
package_name Specifies the package name in the form SUNWname. To view
detailed information about packages and their names, on an
installed system, use the pkginfo -l command.

152 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
add | delete Specifies to add or remove the specified package. If you do
not specify add or delete, add is used by default.

Note – You can add more than one package by adding

another package entry to the profile and omitting the
location. The location of the previous package is used for all
subsequent packages if the location is left blank.

[retrieval_type location] Specifies the addition of a package or packages that are

located outside the Solaris distribution that is being
installed. The values of retrieval_type and location depend on
where the package is stored. The following sections contain
the values you can use for retrieval_type and location and
examples of how to use the package_name keyword.

Packages Stored on an NFS Server

If the package is stored on an NFS server, use one of the following syntaxes for the
package keyword.
package package_name add nfs server_name:/path [retry n]
package package_name add nfs://server_name:/path [retry n]

package_name Specifies the package name in the form SUNWname. To view detailed
information about packages and their names, on an installed system,
use the pkginfo -l command.
server_name Specifies the name of the server where you stored the package.
path Specifies the location of the package directory on the specified server.
If the path contains $HOST, $HOST is replaced with the name of the
host system that you are installing.
retry n Is an optional keyword. n is the maximum number of times the
installation process attempts to mount the directory.

EXAMPLE 9–12 Adding a Package by Using NFS

In this example, the package profile keyword adds the SUNWnew package from the
NFS location nfs://golden/packages/Solaris_10/. If a mount fails, the NFS
mount is tried five times.
package SUNWnew add nfs golden:/packages/Solaris_10 retry 5

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 153

 Packages Stored on an HTTP Server
If the package is stored on an HTTP server, use one of the following syntaxes for the
package keyword.
package package_name add http://server_name[:port] path optional_keywords
package package_name add http server_name[:port] path optional_keywords

package_name Specifies the package name in the form SUNWname. To view

detailed information about packages and their names, on an
installed system, use the pkginfo -l command.
server_name Specifies the name of the server where you stored the package.
port Specifies an optional port. port can be a port number or the name
of a TCP service that has a port number that is determined at
runtime.

If you do not specify a port, the default HTTP port number 80 is

used.
path Specifies the location of the package to be retrieved from the
specified server. When using an HTTP server, the package must
be in package datastream format.
optional_keywords Specifies the optional keywords to use when you retrieve a
package from an HTTP server.

TABLE 9–6 Optional package Keywords to Use With HTTP

Keyword Value Definition

timeout min The timeout keyword enables you to specify, in minutes, the maximum length
of time that is allowed to pass without receipt of data from the HTTP server. If
a timeout occurs, the connection is closed, reopened, and resumed. If you
specify a timeout value of 0 (zero), the connection is not reopened.
If a timeout reconnection occurs, the package is retried from the beginning of
the package and the data that was retrieved prior to the timeout is discarded.

proxy host:port The proxy keyword enables you to specify a proxy host and proxy port. You
can use a proxy host to retrieve a Solaris package from the other side of a
firewall. You must supply a proxy port when you specify the proxy keyword.

EXAMPLE 9–13 Adding a Package by Using HTTP

In this example, the package profile keyword adds all the packages listed in the
Solaris_10 directory from the HTTP location
http://package.central/Solaris_10. If five minutes pass and no data is
received, the package data is retrieved again. Previous package data is discarded.
Either of the following formats can be used.
package SUNWnew add http package.central/Solaris_10 timeout 5

package SUNWnew add http://package.central/Solaris_10 timeout 5

154 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 EXAMPLE 9–14 Adding a Package by Using HTTP with a Proxy Port

In this example, the package profile keyword adds all the packages listed in the
Solaris_10 directory from the HTTP location
http://package.central/Solaris_10. The package is retrieved across a firewall
by using the proxy keyword.
package SUNWnew add http://package.central/Solaris_10 proxy webcache.east:8080

Packages Stored on a Local Device

You can retrieve a Solaris package from a local device if you stored the package on a
file system-oriented, random-access device, such as a diskette or a DVD-ROM. Use the
following syntax for the package keyword.
package package_name add local_device device path file_system_type

package_name Specifies the package name in the form SUNWname. To view

detailed information about packages and their names, on an
installed system, use the pkginfo -l command.
device Specifies the name of the drive where the Solaris package resides.
If the device name is a canonical path, the device is mounted
directly. If you supply a device name that is not a canonical path,
the installation utility adds /dev/dsk/ to the path.
path Specifies the path to the Solaris package, relative to the root (/) file
system on the device you specified.
file_system_type Specifies the type of file system on the device. If you do not supply
a file system type, the installation utility attempts to mount a UFS
file system. If the UFS mount fails, the installation utility attempts
to mount an HSFS file system.

EXAMPLE 9–15 Adding a Package by Using a Local Device With a UFS File System

In this example, the package profile keyword adds the SUNWnew package from the
directory /Solaris_10/Product from the local device c0t6d0s0. This is a UFS file
system.
package SUNWnew add local_device c0t6d0s0 /Solaris_10/Product ufs

EXAMPLE 9–16 Adding a Package by Using a Local Device From an HSFS File System

In this example, the package profile keyword adds the SUNWnew package from the
directory /Solaris_10/Product from the local device c0t6d0s0. This is an HSFS file
system.
package SUNWnew add local_device c0t6d0s0 /Solaris_10/Product hsfs

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 155

 Packages Stored on a Local File
A package can be installed from the miniroot from which you booted the system.
When you perform a custom JumpStart installation, you boot the system from a DVD,
CD, or an NFS-based miniroot. The installation software is loaded and run from this
miniroot. Therefore, a package that you stored in the DVD, CD, or NFS-based miniroot
is accessible as a local file. Use the following syntax for the package keyword.
package package_name add local_file path

package_name Specifies the package name in the form SUNWname. To view detailed
information about packages and their names, on an installed system,
use the pkginfo -l command.
path Specifies the location of the package. The path must be accessible to
the system as a local file while the system is booted from the Solaris
10 Software - 1 CD or from the Solaris 10 Operating System DVD.
The system cannot access /net when it is booted from the Solaris 10
Software - 1 CD or from the Solaris 10 Operating System DVD.

EXAMPLE 9–17 Adding a Package by Using a Local File

In this example, the package profile keyword adds the SUNWnew package from the
/Solaris_10/Product directory.
package SUNWnew add local_file /Solaris_10/Product

Limitations When Using the package Keyword

Note these limitations when using the package keyword:
■ Some packages are required and cannot be deleted.
■ You cannot individually add or delete localization packages by using the package
profile keyword. To add localization packages, use the locale profile keyword.
■ Packages cannot be retrieved from an FTP server location or local backup, such as
tape.
■ Packages within the Solaris distribution being installed cannot be added from
alternate locations. If a package from the Solaris distribution is specified, the
package cannot be followed by an alternative location in order to maintain
consistency with the resulting installed system.
■ In order to install without manual intervention, the package must be installable by
using the pkgadd command. The same admin file must be used to install the
software group packages and the package that resides in another location.
■ If the retrieval_type is HTTP, then the package must be in stream format.
■ If the retrieval_type is NFS server, local device, or local file, then the package
should follow standard packaging format with the directory name being the
same as the package being installed.

156 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 ■ If a package is being added from a separate location and a package depends on
another package that is not currently installed, the package is not installed. An
error message is logged into the install or upgrade log file.
■ If the package is being installed with a Solaris Flash archive, follow these
guidelines.
■ Any package installed must be compatible with the archive.
■ If a package is present in the archive, the JumpStart overwrites the existing
package.

Upgrade Behavior When Using the package Keyword

When you use package for an upgrade, the JumpStart program performs the
following actions:
■ All packages already on the system are automatically upgraded.
■ If you specify package_name add and package_name is not installed on the system,
the package is installed.
■ If you specify package_name delete and package_name is installed on the system,
the package is deleted before the upgrade begins.
■ If you specify package_name delete and package_name is not installed on the
system, the package is not installed if the package is part of a cluster that is
designated to be installed.

partitioning Profile Keyword

partitioning type

partitioning defines how the disks are divided into slices for file systems during
the installation.

If you do not specify partitioning in the profile, the default type of partitioning
is used by default.
type Use one of the following values:
default The JumpStart program selects the disks and creates the file
systems on which to install the specified software, except for
any file systems that are specified by the filesys keywords.
rootdisk is selected first. The JumpStart program uses
additional disks if the specified software does not fit on
rootdisk.

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 157

 existing The JumpStart program uses the existing file systems on the
system’s disks. All file systems except /, /usr,
/usr/openwin, /opt, and /var are preserved. The
JumpStart program uses the last mount-point field from the file
system superblock to determine which file-system mount point
the slice represents.

Note – When you use both the filesys and partitioning

existing profile keywords, you must set size size to
existing.

explicit The JumpStart program uses the disks and creates the file
systems that are specified by the filesys keywords. If you
specify only the root (/) file system with the filesys
keyword, all of the Solaris software is installed in the root (/)
file system.

Note – If you use the explicit profile value, you must use the
filesys keyword to specify the disks to use and file systems
to create.

patch Profile Keyword

patch patch_id_list | patch_file patch_location optional_keywords]

patch_id_list Specifies the patch ID numbers that are to be installed. The list
should be a list of comma-separated Solaris patch IDs. The
patches are installed in the order specified in the list. Do not add
a space after the comma, for example: 112467-01,112765-02.
patch_file A file with a list of patches that is found in the patch_location. The
patches are installed in the order specified in the file.
patch_location Specifies the location where the patches reside. The locations
allowed are the following:
■ NFS server
■ HTTP server
■ Local device
■ Local file
optional_keywords Optional keywords depend on where patches are stored. The
following sections describe the possible locations and optional
keywords.

158 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 Patches Stored on an NFS Server
If the patch is stored on an NFS server, use one of the following syntaxes for the
patch keyword.
patch patch_id_list | patch_file nfs server_name:/patch_directory [retry n]
patch patch_id_list | patch_file nfs://server_name/patch_director [retry n]

patch_id_list Specifies the patch ID numbers that are to be installed. The list
should be a list of comma-separated Solaris patch IDs. The patches
are installed in the order specified in the list.
patch_file A file with a list of patches that is found in the patch_location. The
patches are installed in the order specified in the file.
server_name Specifies the name of the server where you stored the patches.
patch_directory Specifies the location of the patch directory on the specified server.
The patches must be in standard patch format.
retry n Is an optional keyword. n is the maximum number of times the
install utility attempts to mount the directory.

EXAMPLE 9–18 Adding a Patch With an Ordered List by Using NFS

In this example, the patch profile keyword adds all the patches listed in the patch
file from the NFS patch directory nfs://patch_master/Solaris/v10/patches.
Patches are installed in the order listed in the patch. If a mount fails, the NFS mount
is tried five times.
patch patch_file nfs://patch_master/Solaris/v10/patches retry 5

EXAMPLE 9–19 Adding a Patch by Using NFS

In this example, the patch profile keyword adds the patches 112467–01 and 112765–02
from the patch directory /Solaris/v10/patches on the server patch_master.
patch 112467-01,112765-02 nfs patch_master:/Solaris/v10/patches

Patches Stored on an HTTP Server

If the patch is stored on an HTTP server, use one of the following syntaxes for the
patch keyword.
patch patch_id_list | patch_file http://server_name [:port] patch_directory optional_http_keywords

patch patch_id_list | patch_file http server_name [:port] patch_directory optional_http_keywords

patch_id_list Specifies the patch ID numbers that are to be installed. The list
should be a list of comma-separated Solaris patch IDs. The
patches are installed in the order specified in the list. Do not add
a space after the comma, for example: 112467-01,112765-02.

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 159

 patch_file A file with a list of patches that is found in the patch_location. The
patches are installed in the order specified in the file.
server_name Specifies the name of the server where you stored the patch.
port Specifies an optional port. port can be a port number or the name
of a TCP service that has a port number that is determined at
runtime.

If you do not specify a port, the default HTTP port number 80 is

used.
patch_directory Specifies the location of the patch directory to be retrieved from
the specified server. When using an HTTP server, the patch must
be in JAR format.
optional_keywords Specifies the optional keywords to use when you retrieve a patch
from an HTTP server.

TABLE 9–7 Optional patch Keywords to Use With HTTP

Keyword Value Definition

timeout min The timeout keyword enables you to specify, in minutes, the maximum length
of time that is allowed to pass without receipt of data from the HTTP server. If
a timeout occurs, the connection is closed, reopened, and resumed. If you
specify a timeout value of 0 (zero), the connection is not reopened.
If a timeout reconnection occurs, the package is retried from the beginning of
the package and the data that was retrieved prior to the timeout is discarded.

proxy host:port The proxy keyword enables you to specify a proxy host and proxy port. You
can use a proxy host to retrieve a Solaris package from the other side of a
firewall. You must supply a proxy port when you specify the proxy keyword.

EXAMPLE 9–20 Adding a Patch With an Ordered List by Using HTTP

In this example, the patch profile keyword adds all the patches listed in the
patch_file file from the HTTP location
http://patch.central/Solaris/v10/patches. The patches are installed in the
order specified in the file the patch file. If five minutes pass and no data is received,
the patch data is retrieved again. Previous patch data is discarded.
patch patch_file http://patch.central/Solaris/v10/patches timeout 5

EXAMPLE 9–21 Adding a Patch by Using HTTP

In this example, the patch profile keyword entry adds the patches 112467–01 and
112765–02 from the patch location
http://patch_master/Solaris/v10/patches.
patch 112467-01,112765-02 http://patch.central/Solaris/v10/patches

160 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
Patches Stored on a Local Device
You can retrieve a Solaris package from a local device if you stored the package on a
file system-oriented, random-access device, such as a diskette or a DVD-ROM. Use the
following syntax for the patch keyword.
patch patch_id_list | patch_file local_device \
device path file_system_type

patch_id_list Specifies the patch ID numbers that are to be installed. The list
should be a list of comma-separated Solaris patch IDs. The patches
are installed in the order specified in the list. Do not add a space
after the comma, for example: 112467-01,112765-02.
patch_file A file with a list of patches that is found in the patch_location. The
patches are installed in the order specified in the file.
device Specifies the name of the drive where the Solaris package resides.
If the device name is a canonical path, the device is mounted
directly. If you supply a device name that is not a canonical path,
the installation utility adds /dev/dsk/ to the path.
path Specifies the path to the Solaris patch, relative to the root (/) file
system on the device you specified.
file_system_type Specifies the type of file system on the device. If you do not supply
a file system type, the installation utility attempts to mount a UFS
file system. If the UFS mount fails, the installation utility attempts
to mount an HSFS file system.

EXAMPLE 9–22 Adding a Patch With an Ordered List by Using a Local Device

In this example, the patch profile keyword adds all the patches listed in the
patch_file file from the directory /Solaris10/patches from the local device
c0t6d0s0. The patch file determines the order of patches to be installed.
patch patch_cal_device c0t6d0s0 /Solaris_10/patches

EXAMPLE 9–23 Adding a Patch by Using a Local Device

In this example, the patch profile keyword adds the patches 112467–01 and 112765–02
from the patch directory /Solaris_10/patches from local device c0t6d0s0.
patch 112467-01,112765-02 local_device c0t6d0s0 /Solaris_10/patches

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 161

 Patches Stored on a Local File
A patch can be installed from the miniroot from which you booted the system. When
you perform a custom JumpStart installation, you boot the system from a DVD, CD, or
an NFS-based miniroot. The installation software is loaded and run from this miniroot.
Therefore, a package that you stored in the DVD, CD, or NFS-based miniroot is
accessible as a local file. Use the following syntax for the patch keyword.
patch patch_id_list | patch_file local_file patch _directory

patch_id_list Specifies the patch ID numbers that are to be installed. The list
should be a list of comma-separated Solaris patch IDs. The patches
are installed in the order specified in the list. Do not add a space
after the comma, for example: 112467-01,112765-02.
patch_file A file with a list of patches that is found in the patch_location. The
patches are installed in the order specified in the file.
patch_directory Specifies the location of the patch directory. The patch directory
must be accessible to the system as a local file while the system is
booted from the Solaris 10 Software - 1 CD or from the Solaris 10
Operating System DVD. The system cannot access /net when it is
booted from the Solaris 10 Software - 1 CD or from the Solaris 10
Operating System DVD.

EXAMPLE 9–24 Adding a Patch With an Ordered List by Using a Local File

In this example, the patch profile keyword adds all the patches that are listed in the
patch_file file from the /Solaris_10/patches directory. The patch file
determines the order of patches to be installed.
patch patch_cal_file /Solaris_10/patches

EXAMPLE 9–25 Adding a Patch by Using a Local File

In this example, the patch profile keyword adds the patches 112467–01 and 112765–02
from the patch directory /Solaris_10/patches.
patch 112467-01,112765-02 local_file /Solaris_10/patches

Limitations When Using the patch Keyword

Note the following limitations when using the package keyword:
■ Patches cannot be retrieved from FTP locations or local backup, such as tape.
■ Signed patches cannot be added.
■ Patches must be installable with the patchadd command.
■ If a patch depends on a patch that is not currently installed, the patch is not
installed. An error message is logged into the installation or upgrade log file.

162 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
■ You must determine the correct order of the patches for a correct installation of the
patches.

root_device Profile Keyword

root_device slice

root_device designates the system’s root disk. “How the System’s Root Disk Is
Determined” on page 163 contains additional information.

When you are upgrading a system, root_device designates the root (/) file system
and the file systems that are mounted by its /etc/vfstab file to be upgraded. You
must specify root_device if more than one root (/) file system can be upgraded on a
system. You must specify slice in the form cwtxdysz or cxdysz.

When you use the root_device keyword, consider the following:

■ If you specify root_device on a system with only one disk, the root_device
and the disk must match. Also, any filesys keywords that specify the root (/)
file system must match root_device.
■ If you are upgrading a RAID-1 volume (mirror), the value that is specified for
root_device should be one side of the mirror. The other side of the mirror is
automatically upgraded.

EXAMPLE 9–26 root_device Profile Keyword

root_device c0t0d0s2

How the System’s Root Disk Is Determined

A system’s root disk is the disk on the system that contains the root (/) file system. In
a profile, you can use the rootdisk variable in place of a disk name, which the
JumpStart program sets to the system’s root disk. Table 9–8 describes how the
JumpStart program determines the system’s root disk for the installation.

Note – The JumpStart program only determines a system’s root disk size during an
initial installation. You cannot change a system’s root disk during an upgrade.

TABLE 9–8 How JumpStart Determines a System’s Root Disk (Initial Installation)

Stage Action

1 If the root_device keyword is specified in the profile, the JumpStart program sets
rootdisk to the root device.

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 163

 TABLE 9–8 How JumpStart Determines a System’s Root Disk (Initial Installation)
(Continued)
Stage Action

2 If rootdisk is not set and the boot_device keyword is specified in the profile, the
JumpStart program sets rootdisk to the boot device.

3 If rootdisk is not set and a filesys cwtxdysz size / entry is specified in the
profile, the JumpStart program sets rootdisk to the disk that is specified in the
entry.

4 If rootdisk is not set and a rootdisk.sn entry is specified in the profile, the
JumpStart program searches the system’s disks in kernel probe order for an existing
root file system on the specified slice. If a disk is found, the JumpStart program sets
rootdisk to the found disk.

5 If rootdisk is not set and partitioning existing is specified in the profile, the
JumpStart program searches the system’s disks in kernel probe order for an existing
root file system. If a root file system is not found or more than one is found, an error
occurs. If a root file system is found, the JumpStart program sets rootdisk to the
found disk.

6 If rootdisk is not set, the JumpStart program sets rootdisk to the disk where the
root (/) file system is installed.

system_type Profile Keyword

system_type type_switch

system_type defines the type of system on which the Solaris OS is to be installed.

type_switch represents the option standalone or server, which you use to indicate
the type of system on which the Solaris software is to be installed. If you do not
specify system_type in a profile, standalone is used by default.

usedisk Profile Keyword

usedisk disk_name ...

By default, the JumpStart program uses all of the operational disks on the system
when you specify partitioning default. The usedisk profile keyword
designates one or more disks that you want the JumpStart program to use. You must
specify disk_name in the form cxtydz or cydz, for example, c0t0d0 or c0d0s0.

If you specify usedisk in a profile, the JumpStart program uses only the disks that
you specify after the usedisk keyword.

164 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 Note – You cannot specify the usedisk keyword and the dontuse keyword in the
same profile.

Custom JumpStart Environment

Variables
You can use environment variables in your begin and finish scripts. For example, a
begin script might extract the disk size, SI_DISKSIZES, and install or not install
particular packages on a system, based on the actual disk size the script extracts.

Information that is gathered about a system is stored in these environment variables,

which are generally set or not, depending on the rule keywords and values you use in
the rules file.

For example, information about which operating system is already installed on a

system is only available in SI_INSTALLED after the installed keyword is used.

Table 9–9 describes these variables and their values.

TABLE 9–9 Installation Environment Variables

Environment Variable Value

SI_ARCH The hardware architecture of the install client. The SI_ARCH variable is set
when the arch keyword is used in the rules file.

SI_BEGIN The name of the begin script, if one is used.

SI_CLASS The name of the profile that is used to install the install client.

SI_DISKLIST A comma-separated list of disk names on the install client. The SI_DISKLIST
variable is set when the disksize keyword is used and matched in the rules
file. The SI_DISKLIST and SI_NUMDISKS variables are used to determine the
physical disk to use for the rootdisk. rootdisk is described in “How the
System’s Root Disk Is Determined” on page 163.

SI_DISKSIZES A comma-separated list of disk sizes on the install client. The SI_DISKSIZES
variable is set when the disksize keyword is used and matched in the rules
file.

SI_DOMAINNAME The domain name. The SI_DOMAINNAME variable is set when the
dommainname keyword is used and matched in the rules file.

SI_FINISH The name of the finish script, if one is used.

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 165

TABLE 9–9 Installation Environment Variables (Continued)
Environment Variable Value

SI_HOSTADDRESS The install client’s IP address.

SI_HOSTNAME The install client’s host name. The SI_HOSTNAME variable is set when the
hostname keyword is used and matched in the rules file.

SI_INSTALLED The device name of a disk with a specific operating system on the disk, for
example, Solaris, SunOS, or System V. The SI_INSTALLED variable is set when
the installed keyword is used and matched in the rules file. SI_INST_OS
and SI_INST_VER are used to determine the value of SI_INSTALLED.

SI_INST_OS The name of the operating system. SI_INST_OS and SI_INST_VER are used
to determine the value of SI_INSTALLED.

SI_INST_VER The version of the operating system. SI_INST_OS and SI_INST_VER are used
to determine the value of SI_INSTALLED.

SI_KARCH The install client’s kernel architecture. The SI_KARCH variable is set when the
karch keyword is used and matched in the rules file.

SI_MEMSIZE The amount of physical memory on the install client. The SI_MEMSIZE
variable is set when the memsize keyword is used and matched in the rules
file.

SI_MODEL The install client’s model name. The SI_MODEL variable is set when the model
keyword is used and matched in the rules file.

SI_NETWORK The install client’s network number. The SI_NETWORK variable is set when the
network keyword is used and matched in the rules file.

SI_NUMDISKS The number of disks on an install client. The SI_NUMDISKS variable is set
when the disksize keyword is used and matched in the rules file. The
SI_NUMDISKS and SI_DISKLIST variables are used to determine the physical
disk to use for the rootdisk. rootdisk is described in “How the System’s
Root Disk Is Determined” on page 163.

SI_OSNAME The operating system release on the Solaris software image. For example, you
can use the SI_OSNAME variable in a script if you are installing the Solaris
software on systems that are based on the version of the operating system on
the Solaris 10 Operating System DVD or the Solaris 10 Software - 1 CD image.

SI_ROOTDISK The device name of the disk that is represented by the logical name rootdisk.
The SI_ROOTDISK variable is set when the disksize or the installed
keyword is set to rootdisk in the rules file.

SI_ROOTDISKSIZE The size of the disk that is represented by the logical name rootdisk. The
SI_ROOTDISKSIZE variable is set when the disksize or the installed
keyword is set to rootdisk in the rules file.

SI_TOTALDISK The total amount of disk space on the install client. The SI_TOTALDISK
variable is set when the totaldisk keyword is used and matched in the
rules file.

166 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 Probe Keywords and Values
Table 9–10 describes each rule keyword and its equivalent probe keyword.

Note – Always place probe keywords at or near the beginning of the rules file.

TABLE 9–10 Descriptions of Probe Keywords

Equivalent Probe
Rule Keyword Keyword Description of Probe Keyword

any None

arch arch Determines the kernel architecture, i386 or SPARC, and sets SI_ARCH.

disksize disks Returns the size of a system’s disks in Mbytes in kernel probe order,
c0t3d0s0, c0t3d0s1, c0t4d0s0. disksize sets SI_DISKLIST,
SI_DISKSIZES, SI_NUMDISKS, and SI_TOTALDISK.

domainname domainname Returns a system’s NIS or NIS+ domain name or blank and sets
SI_DOMAINNAME. The domainname keyword returns the output of
domainname(1M).

hostaddress hostaddress Returns a system’s IP address, the first address that is listed in the output of
ifconfig(1M) -a that is not lo0, and sets SI_HOSTADDRESS.

hostname hostname Returns a system’s host name that is the output from uname(1) -n and sets
SI_HOSTNAME.

installed installed Returns the version name of the Solaris OS that is installed on a system and
sets SI_ROOTDISK and SI_INSTALLED.
If the JumpStart program finds a Solaris release but is unable to determine
the version, the version that is returned is SystemV.

karch karch Returns a system’s platform group, for example i86pc or sun4u, and sets
SI_KARCH. For a list of platform names, see Solaris 10 Sun Hardware Platform
Guide at http://docs.sun.com.

memsize memsize Returns the size of physical memory on a system in Mbytes and sets
SI_MEMSIZE.

model model Returns a system’s platform name and sets SI_MODEL. For a list of platform
names, see the Solaris 10 Sun Hardware Platform Guide at
http://docs.sun.com.

Chapter 9 • Custom JumpStart (Reference) 167

TABLE 9–10 Descriptions of Probe Keywords (Continued)
Equivalent Probe
Rule Keyword Keyword Description of Probe Keyword

network network Returns a system’s network number, which the JumpStart program
determines by performing a logical AND between the system’s IP address
and the subnet mask. The system’s IP address and the subnet mask are
extracted from the first address that is listed in the output of ifconfig(1M)
-a that is not lo0. The network keyword sets SI_NETWORK.

osname osname Returns the version and operating system name of the Solaris OS that is
found on a CD and sets SI_OSNAME.
If the JumpStart program finds a Solaris release but is unable to determine
the version, the version that is returned is SystemV.

rootdisk Returns the name and size in Mbytes of a system’s root disk and sets
SI_ROOTDISK.

totaldisk totaldisk Returns the total disk space on a system (in Mbytes) and sets
SI_TOTALDISK. The total disk space includes all of the operational disks
that are attached to a system.

168 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
PART III Using RAID-1 Volumes

This part provides an overview of Solaris Volume Manager components that can be
used in a Solaris installation or upgrade. This part also includes guidelines and
requirements that are necessary to use RAID-1 volumes.

169
170 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
CHAPTER 10

Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors)

During Installation (Overview)

This section discusses the advantages of creating mirrored file systems. The section
also describes the Solaris Volume Manager components that are required to create
mirrored file systems.

This chapter describes the following topics.

■ “Why Use RAID-1 Volumes?” on page 171
■ “How Do RAID-1 Volumes Work?” on page 172
■ “Overview of Solaris Volume Manager Components” on page 174
■ “Example of RAID-1 Volume Disk Layout” on page 177

For additional information about how to create mirrored file systems with Solaris Live
Upgrade, see “General Guidelines When Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrored) File
Systems” in Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Solaris Live Upgrade and Upgrade Planning.

For additional information about how to create mirrored file systems with the custom
JumpStart installation method, see “filesys Profile Keyword (Creating RAID-1
Volumes)” on page 144 and “metadb Profile Keyword (Creating State Database
Replicas)” on page 150.

Why Use RAID-1 Volumes?

During the installation or upgrade, you can create RAID-1 volumes to duplicate your
system data over multiple physical disks. By duplicating your data over separate
disks, you can protect your data from disk corruption or a disk failure.

The Solaris custom JumpStart and Solaris Live Upgrade installation methods use the
Solaris Volume Manager technology to create RAID-1 volumes that mirror a file
system. Solaris Volume Manager provides a powerful way to reliably manage your
disks and data by using volumes. Solaris Volume Manager enables concatenations,

171
 stripes, and other complex configurations. The custom JumpStart and Solaris Live
Upgrade installation methods enable a subset of these tasks, such as creating a RAID-1
volume for the root (/) file system. You can create RAID-1 volumes during your
installation or upgrade, eliminating the need to create them after the installation.

Installation Program Limitations

The custom JumpStart Supports RAID-0 and RAID-1 volumes, but does not support other
program Solaris Volume Manager components, such as RAID-5 volumes
Supports the creation of RAID-1 volumes during an initial
installation only

Solaris Live Upgrade Supports RAID-0 and RAID-1 volumes, but does not support other
Solaris Volume Manager components, such as RAID-5 volumes
Supports the creation of RAID-1 volumes during an upgrade

For detailed information about complex Solaris Volume Manager software and
components, see Solaris Volume Manager Administration Guide.

How Do RAID-1 Volumes Work?

Solaris Volume Manager uses virtual disks to manage physical disks and their
associated data. In Solaris Volume Manager, a virtual disk is called a volume. A volume
is a name for a group of physical slices that appear to the system as a single, logical
device. Volumes are actually pseudo, or virtual, devices in standard UNIX® terms.

A volume is functionally identical to a physical disk in the view of an application or a

file system (such as UFS). Solaris Volume Manager converts I/O requests that are
directed at a volume into I/O requests to the underlying member disks.

Solaris Volume Manager volumes are built from slices (disk partitions) or from other
Solaris Volume Manager volumes.

You use volumes to increase performance and data availability. In some instances,
volumes can also increase I/O performance. Functionally, volumes behave the same
way as slices. Because volumes look like slices, they are transparent to end users,
applications, and file systems. Like physical devices, you can use Solaris Volume
Manager software to access volumes through block or raw device names. The volume
name changes, depending on whether the block or raw device is used.

The custom JumpStart installation method and Solaris Live Upgrade support the use
of block devices to create mirrored file systems. See “RAID Volume Name
Requirements and Guidelines for Custom JumpStart and Solaris Live Upgrade”
on page 182 for details about volume names.

172 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
When you create RAID-0 volumes (single-slice concatenations) and RAID-1 volumes,
Solaris Volume Manager duplicates data on the concatenations (submirrors), and treats
the submirrors as one volume.

Figure 10–1 shows a mirror that duplicates the root (/) file system over two physical
disks.

Original System with 2 physical disks

hdisk0 hdisk1
c0t0d0 c0t1d0
root (/)

/swap

Mirrored Root File System

with 2 RAID-0 Volumes (submirrors)
hdisk0 hdisk1
c0t0d0 c0t1d0
d30
d31 d32
root (/) root (/)

/swap

d30 — RAID-1 volume (mirror)

d31 — Single-slice concatenation (submirror)
d32 — Single-slice concatenation (submirror)

FIGURE 10–1 Creating RAID-1 Volumes on the Root (/) File System on Two Disks

Figure 10–1 shows a system with the following configuration.

Chapter 10 • Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors) During Installation (Overview) 173

 ■ The root file system (/) on hdisk0 is included in the single-slice concatenation that
is named d31.
■ A single-slice concatenation that is named d32 is created on the hard disk that is
named hdisk1.
■ The mirror that is named d30 consists of the submirrors that are named d31 and
d32.
■ The mirror duplicates the data in the root file system on both submirrors.

Overview of Solaris Volume Manager

Components
The custom JumpStart installation method and Solaris Live Upgrade enable you to
create the following components that are required to replicate data.
■ State database and state database replicas (metadbs)
■ Single-slice concatenations (submirrors)
■ RAID-1 volumes (mirrors)

This section briefly describes each of these components. For complete information
about these components, see Solaris Volume Manager Administration Guide.

State Database and State Database Replicas

The state database is a database that stores information on a physical disk about the
state of your Solaris Volume Manager configuration. The state database records and
tracks changes that are made to your configuration. Solaris Volume Manager
automatically updates the state database when a configuration or state change occurs.
Creating a new volume is an example of a configuration change. A submirror failure is
an example of a state change.

The state database is actually a collection of multiple, replicated database copies. Each
copy, referred to as a state database replica, ensures that the data in the database is
always valid. Having copies of the state database protects against data loss from single
points of failure. The state database tracks the location and status of all known state
database replicas.

Solaris Volume Manager cannot operate until you have created the state database and
its state database replicas. A Solaris Volume Manager configuration must have an
operating state database.

When you set up your configuration, you can locate the state database replicas on
either of the following:

174 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
■ Dedicated slices
■ (Solaris Live Upgrade only) Slices that will later become part of volumes

You can keep more than one copy of a state database on one slice. However, you
might make the system more vulnerable to a single point of failure by placing state
database replicas on a single slice.

The state database replicas ensure that the data in the state database is always valid.
When the state database is updated, each state database replica is also updated. The
updates occur one at a time to protect against corruption of all updates if the system
crashes.

If your system loses a state database replica, Solaris Volume Manager must identify
which state database replicas still contain valid data. Solaris Volume Manager
determines this information by using a majority consensus algorithm. This algorithm
requires that a majority (half + 1) of the state database replicas be available and in
agreement before any of them are considered valid. Because of this majority consensus
algorithm, you must create at least three state database replicas when you set up your
disk configuration. A consensus can be reached if at least two of the three state
database replicas are available.

Each state database replica occupies 4 Mbytes (8192 disk sectors) of disk storage by
default. Replicas can be stored on the following devices:
■ A dedicated local disk slice
■ (Solaris Live Upgrade only) A local slice that will be part of a volume
■ (Solaris Live Upgrade only) A local slice that will be part of a UFS logging device

Replicas cannot be stored on the root (/), swap, or /usr slices, or on slices that
contain existing file systems or data. After the replicas have been stored, volumes or
file systems can be placed on the same slice.

When using custom JumpStart or Solaris Live “State Database Replicas Guidelines and
Upgrade to install RAID-1 volumes, review Requirements” on page 180
these guidelines and requirements

For more detailed information about the state Solaris Volume Manager Administration Guide
database and state database replicas

RAID-0 Volumes (Concatenations)

The custom JumpStart and Solaris Live Upgrade installation methods enable you to
create RAID-0 volumes. A RAID-0 volume single-slice concatenation is a volume
whose data is organized serially and adjacently across components, forming one
logical storage unit. The custom JumpStart installation method and Solaris Live
Upgrade do not enable you to create stripes or other complex Solaris Volume Manager
volumes.

Chapter 10 • Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors) During Installation (Overview) 175

 During the installation or upgrade, you can create RAID-1 volumes (mirrors) and
attach RAID-0 volumes to these mirrors. The RAID-0 volumes that are mirrored are
called submirrors. A mirror is made of one or more RAID-0 volumes. After the
installation, you can manage the data on separate RAID-0 submirror volumes by
administering the RAID-1 mirror volume through the Solaris Volume Manager
software.

The custom JumpStart installation method enables you to create a mirror that consists
of up to two submirrors. Solaris Live Upgrade enables you to create a mirror that
consists of up to three submirrors. Practically, a two-way mirror is usually sufficient. A
third submirror enables you to make online backups without losing data redundancy
while one submirror is offline for the backup.

For RAID–0 volume planning information “RAID-1 and RAID-0 Volume Requirements
and Guidelines” on page 181

For RAID-0 volumes details Solaris Volume Manager Administration Guide

RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors)

A RAID-1 volume, or mirror, is a volume that maintains identical copies of the data in
RAID-0 volumes (single-slice concatenations.) Using RAID-1 volumes to mirror file
systems requires an investment in disks. You need at least twice as much disk space as
the amount of data. Because Solaris Volume Manager software must write to all
RAID-0 volumes, duplicating the data can also increase the time that is required for
write requests to be written to disk.

With RAID-1 volumes, data can be read from both RAID-0 volumes simultaneously
(either volume can service any request), providing improved performance. If one
physical disk fails, you can continue to use the mirror with no loss in performance or
loss of data.

After you configure a RAID-1 volume, the volume can be used just as if it were a
physical slice.

You can duplicate any file system, including existing file systems. You can also use a
RAID-1 volume for any application, such as a database.

For RAID-1 volume planning information “RAID-1 and RAID-0 Volume Requirements
and Guidelines” on page 181

For RAID-1 volume details Solaris Volume Manager Administration Guide

176 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
Example of RAID-1 Volume Disk Layout
The following figure shows a RAID-1 volume that duplicates the root file system (/)
over two physical disks. State database replicas (metadbs) are placed on both disks.

Original System with 2 physical disks

hdisk0 hdisk1
c0t0d0 c0t1d0
root (/)

/swap

Mirrored File System with 2 RAID-0 Volumes

and State Database Replicas (metadbs)
hdisk0 hdisk1
c0t0d0 c0t1d0
d30
d31 d32
root (/) root (/)

/swap /swap

metadbs metadbs

d30 — RAID-1 volume (mirror)

d31 — Single-slice concatenation (submirror)
d32 — Single-slice concatenation (submirror)

FIGURE 10–2 RAID-1 Volume Disk Layout

Figure 10–2 shows a system with the following configuration.

Chapter 10 • Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors) During Installation (Overview) 177

 ■ The root file system (/) on hdisk0 is included in the single-slice concatenation that
is named d31.
■ A single-slice concatenation that is named d32 is created on the hard disk that is
named hdisk1.
■ The mirror that is named d30 consists of the submirrors that are named d31 and
d32.
■ The mirror duplicates the data in the root file system on both submirrors.
■ State database replicas are created on slices both hdisk0 and hdisk1.

For an example profile that uses the custom Example 4–12

JumpStart installation method to create this
configuration

For instructions about how to create RAID-1 “To Create a Boot Environment With RAID-1
volumes with Solaris Live Upgrade Volumes (Mirrors) (Command-Line Interface)”
in Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Solaris Live
Upgrade and Upgrade Planning

178 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
CHAPTER 11

Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors)

During Installation (Planning)

This chapter describes the requirements and guidelines that are necessary to create
RAID-1 volumes with the custom JumpStart or Solaris Live Upgrade installation
methods.

This chapter describes the following topics.

■ “System Requirement” on page 179
■ “State Database Replicas Guidelines and Requirements” on page 180
■ “RAID-1 and RAID-0 Volume Requirements and Guidelines” on page 181
■ “How Booting Into Single-User Mode Affects RAID-1 Volumes” on page 185

For additional information about planning to create mirrored file systems with the
Solaris Live Upgrade installation method, see “General Guidelines When Creating
RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrored) File Systems” in Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Solaris Live
Upgrade and Upgrade Planning.

For instructions about how to create mirrored file systems with the custom JumpStart
installation method, see “filesys Profile Keyword (Creating RAID-1 Volumes)”
on page 144 and “metadb Profile Keyword (Creating State Database Replicas)”
on page 150.

System Requirement
To create RAID-1 volumes to duplicate data on specific slices, the disks that you plan
to use must be directly attached and available to the system during the installation.

179
 State Database Replicas Guidelines and
Requirements
You should distribute state database replicas across slices, drives, and controllers, to
avoid single points of failure. You want a majority of replicas to survive a single
component failure. If you lose a replica, when a device fails, for example, the failure
might cause problems with running Solaris Volume Manager software or when
rebooting the system. Solaris Volume Manager software requires at least half of the
replicas to be available to run, but a majority (half plus one) to reboot into multiuser
mode.

For detailed instructions about creating and administering state database replicas, see
Solaris Volume Manager Administration Guide.

Selecting Slices for State Database Replicas

Before selecting slices for state database replicas, consider the following guidelines
and recommendations.
■ You should create state database replicas on a dedicated slice of at least 4 Mbytes
per replica. If necessary, you could create state database replicas on a slice that is to
be used as part of a RAID-0 or RAID-1 volume. You must create the replicas before
you add the slice to the volume.
■ By default, the size of a state database replica is 4 Mbytes or 8192 disk blocks.
Because your disk slices might not be that small, you can resize a slice to hold the
state database replica. For information about resizing a slice, see Chapter 12,
“Administering Disks (Tasks),” in System Administration Guide: Devices and File
Systems.
■ You can create state database replicas on slices that are not in use. The part of a
slice that is reserved for the state database replica should not be used for any other
purpose.
■ You cannot create state database replicas on existing file systems, or the root (/),
/usr, and swap file systems. If necessary, you can create a new slice (provided a
slice name is available) by allocating space from swap and then put state database
replicas on that new slice.
■ When a state database replica is placed on a slice that becomes part of a volume,
the capacity of the volume is reduced by the space that is occupied by the replica
or replicas. The space that is used by a replica is rounded up to the next cylinder
boundary and this space is skipped by the volume.

180 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
Choosing the Number of State Database Replicas
Before choosing the number of state database replicas, consider the following
guidelines.
■ A minimum of 3 state database replicas are recommended, up to a maximum of 50
replicas per Solaris Volume Manager disk set. The following guidelines are
recommended:
■ For a system with only a single drive: put all three replicas in one slice.
■ For a system with two to four drives: put two replicas on each drive.
■ For a system with five or more drives: put one replica on each drive.
■ Additional state database replicas can improve the mirror’s performance.
Generally, you need to add two replicas for each mirror you add to the system.
■ If you have a RAID-1 volume that is to be used for small-sized random I/O (for
example, for a database), consider your number of replicas. For best performance,
ensure that you have at least two extra replicas per RAID-1 volume on slices (and
preferably on disks and controllers) that are unconnected to the RAID-1 volume.

Distributing State Database Replicas Across

Controllers
If multiple controllers exist, replicas should be distributed as evenly as possible across
all controllers. This strategy provides redundancy if a controller fails and also helps
balance the load. If multiple disks exist on a controller, at least two of the disks on
each controller should store a replica.

RAID-1 and RAID-0 Volume

Requirements and Guidelines
When you are working with RAID-1 volumes (mirrors) and RAID-0 volumes
(single-slice concatenations), consider the following guidelines.

Custom JumpStart and Solaris Live Upgrade

Guidelines
The custom JumpStart installation method and Solaris Live Upgrade support a subset
of the features that are available in the Solaris Volume Manager software. When you
create mirrored file systems with these installation programs, consider the following
guidelines.

Chapter 11 • Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors) During Installation (Planning) 181

 Installation Program Supported Feature Unsupported Feature

Custom JumpStart and Solaris RAID-0 volume is supported, In Solaris Volume manager a
Live Upgrade but only as a single-slice RAID-0 volume can refer to
concatenation. disk stripes or disk
concatenations. You cannot
create RAID-0 stripe volumes
during the installation or
upgrade.

Custom JumpStart File systems that are created

as RAID-1 volumes do not
need to be created before
installation.

Custom JumpStart You can create up to two More than two RAID-0
RAID-0 volumes (submirrors) volumes are not supported.
for each RAID-1 volume. Two
submirrors usually provide
sufficient data redundancy for
most applications, and the
disk drive costs are less
expensive.

Solaris Live Upgrade You can create up to three More than three RAID-0
RAID-0 volumes (submirrors) volumes are not supported.
for each RAID-1 volume.
Three submirrors enable you
to take a submirror offline and
perform a backup while
maintaining the two
remaining submirrors for
continued data redundancy.

RAID Volume Name Requirements and Guidelines for

Custom JumpStart and Solaris Live Upgrade
Observe the following rules when assigning names for volumes.
■ Use a naming method that maps the slice number and disk number to volume
numbers.
■ Volume names must begin with the letter d followed by a number, for example, d0.
■ Solaris Volume Manager has 128 default volume names from 0–127. The following
list shows some example volume names.
■ Device /dev/md/dsk/d0 – block volume d0
■ Device /dev/md/dsk/d1 – block volume d1
■ Use ranges for each particular type of volume. For example, assign numbers 0–20
for RAID-1 volumes, and 21–40 for RAID-0 volumes.

182 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
■ Instead of specifying the full volume name, such as /dev/md/dsk/d1, you can
often use an abbreviated volume name, such as d1.

RAID Volume Naming Conventions for Solaris Live Upgrade

You can abbreviate the names of physical disk slices and Solaris Volume Manager
volumes. The abbreviation is the shortest name that uniquely identifies a device.
Examples follow.
■ A Solaris Volume Manager volume can be identified by its dnum designation, so
that, for example, /dev/md/dsk/d10 becomes simply d10.
■ If a system has a single controller and multiple disks, you might use t0d0s0, but
with multiple controllers use c0t0d0s0.

When you use the Solaris Live Upgrade to create RAID-1 volumes (mirrors) and
RAID-0 volumes (submirrors), you can let the software detect and assign volume
names, or you can assign the names. If you let the software detect the names, the
software assigns the first mirror or submirror name that is available. If you assign
mirror names, assign names ending in zero so that the installation can use the names
ending in 1 and 2 for submirrors. If you assign submirror names, assign names ending
in 1 or 2. If you assign numbers incorrectly, the mirror might not be created. For
example, if you specify a mirror name with a number that ends in 1 or 2 (d1 or d2),
Solaris Live Upgrade fails to create the mirror if the mirror name is a duplicate of a
submirror’s name.

In this example, Solaris Live Upgrade assigns the volume names. The RAID-1 volumes
d0 and d1 are the only volumes in use. For the mirror d10, Solaris Live Upgrade
chooses d2 for the submirror for the device c0t0d0s0 and d3 for the submirror for
the device c1t0d0s0.
lucreate -n newbe -m /:d10:mirror,ufs -m /:c0t0d0s0:attach -m
/:c1t0d0s0:attach

In this example, the volume names are assigned in the command. For the mirror d10,
d11 is the name for the submirror for the device c0t0d0s0 and d12 is the name for
the submirror for the device c1t0d0s0.
lucreate -n newbe -m /:d10:mirror,ufs -m /:c0t0d0s0,d11:attach -m
/:c1t0d0s0,d12:attach

For detailed information about Solaris Volume Manager naming requirements, see
Solaris Volume Manager Administration Guide.

RAID Volume Naming Conventions for Custom JumpStart

When you use the custom JumpStart installation method to create RAID-1 volumes
(mirrors) and RAID-0 volumes (submirrors), you can let the software detect and assign
volume names to mirrors, or you can assign the names in the profile. If you let the
software detect the names, the software assigns the first volume number that is

Chapter 11 • Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors) During Installation (Planning) 183

 available. If you assign names in the profile, assign mirror names ending in zero so
that the installation can use the names ending in 1 and 2 for submirrors. If you assign
numbers incorrectly, the mirror might not be created. For example, if you specify a
mirror name with a number that ends in 1 or 2 (d1 or d2), JumpStart fails to create the
mirror if the mirror name is a duplicate of a submirror’s name. In the following profile
example, the mirror is assigned the first volume numbers that are available. If the next
available mirror ending in zero is d10, then the names d11 and d12 are assigned to
the submirrors.
filesys mirror c0t0d0s1 /

In the following profile example, the mirror number is assigned in the profile as d30.
The submirror names are assigned by the software, based on the mirror number and
the first available submirrors. In this example, the submirrors are named d31 and d32.
filesys mirror:d30 c0t1d0s0 c0t0d0s0 /

For detailed information about Solaris Volume Manager naming requirements, see
Solaris Volume Manager Administration Guide.

Guidelines for Selecting Disks and Controllers

When you choose the disks and controllers that you want to use to mirror a file
system, consider the following guidelines.
■ Use components that are on different controllers to increase the number of
simultaneous reads and writes that can be performed.
■ Keep the slices of different submirrors on different disks and controllers. Data
protection is diminished considerably if slices of two or more submirrors of the
same mirror are on the same disk.
■ Organize submirrors across separate controllers, because controllers and associated
cables tend to fail more often than disks. This practice also improves mirror
performance.
■ Use the same type of disks and controllers in a single mirror. Particularly in old
SCSI storage devices, different models or brands of disk or controller can have
widely varying performance. Mixing the different performance levels in a single
mirror can cause performance to degrade significantly.

Guidelines for Selecting Slices

When you choose the slices that you want to use to mirror a file system, consider the
following guidelines.
■ Any file system, including root (/), swap, and /usr, can use a mirror. Any
application, such as a database, also can use a mirror.

184 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
■ Make sure that your submirror slices are of equal size. Submirrors of different sizes
result in unused disk space.
■ If you have a mirrored file system in which the first submirror attached does not
start on cylinder 0, all additional submirrors you attach must also not start on
cylinder 0. If you attempt to attach a submirror starting on cylinder 0 to a mirror in
which the original submirror does not start on cylinder 0, the following error
message is displayed:
can’t attach
labeled submirror to an unlabeled mirror

You must ensure that all submirrors you plan to attach to a mirror either all start
on cylinder 0, or that none of them start on cylinder 0.

Starting cylinders do not have to be identical across all submirrors, but all
submirrors must either include or not include cylinder 0.

How Booting Into Single-User Mode

Affects RAID-1 Volumes
If a system with mirrors for root (/), /usr, and swap is booted into single-user mode,
the system indicates that these mirrors are in need of maintenance. When you view
these mirrors with the metastat command, these mirrors, and possibly all mirrors on
the system, appear in the “Needing Maintenance” state.

Though this situation appears to be potentially dangerous, do not be concerned. The

metasync -r command, which normally occurs during boot to resynchronize
mirrors, is interrupted when the system is booted into single-user mode. After the
system is rebooted, the metasync -r command runs and resynchronizes all mirrors.

If this interruption is a concern, run the metasync -r command manually.

For more information about the metasync, see the metasync(1M) man page, and
Solaris Volume Manager Administration Guide.

Chapter 11 • Creating RAID-1 Volumes (Mirrors) During Installation (Planning) 185

186 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
PART IV Appendixes

This part contains troubleshooting and reference information.

187
188 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
APPENDIX A

Troubleshooting (Tasks)

This chapter contains a list of specific error messages and general problems you might
encounter when installing Solaris 10 software. The chapter also explains how to fix the
problems. Start by using this list of sections to determine where in the installation
process the problem occurred.
■ “Problems With Setting Up Network Installations” on page 189
■ “Problems With Booting a System” on page 190
■ “Initial Installation of the Solaris OS” on page 196
■ “Upgrading the Solaris OS” on page 198

Note – When you see the phrase “bootable media,” this means the Solaris installation
program and JumpStart installation method.

Problems With Setting Up Network

Installations
Unknown client “host_name”
Cause: The host_name argument in the add_install_client command is not a
host in the name service.

Description: Add the host host_name to the name service and execute the
add_install_client command again.

189
 Problems With Booting a System
Booting From Media, Error Messages
le0: No carrier - transceiver cable problem
Cause: The system is not connected to the network.

Solution: If this is a nonnetworked system, ignore this message. If this is a

networked system, ensure that the Ethernet cabling is attached securely.

The file just loaded does not appear to be executable

Cause: The system cannot find the proper media for booting.

Solution: Verify that the system has been set up properly to install the Solaris 10
software from the network from an install server. The following are examples of
checks you can make.
■ If you copied the images of the Solaris 10 Operating System DVD or the Solaris
10 Software CDs to the install server, ensure that you specified the correct
platform group for the system when you set it up.
■ If you are using DVD or CD media, ensure that the Solaris 10 Operating System
DVD or Solaris 10 Software - 1 CD is mounted and accessible on the install
server.

boot: cannot open <filename> (SPARC based systems only)

Cause: This error occurs when you override the location of the boot -file by
explicitly setting it.

Note – filename is a variable for the name of the file affected.

Solution: Follow these instructions:

■ Reset the boot -file in the PROM to “ “ (blank).
■ Ensure that the diag-switch is set to off and to true.

Can’t boot from file/device

Cause: The installation media cannot find the bootable media.

Solution: Ensure that the following conditions are met:

■ The DVD-ROM or CD-ROM drive is installed properly and turned on.
■ Solaris 10 Operating System DVD or the Solaris 10 Software - 1 CD is inserted
into the drive.

190 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 ■ The disc is free of damage or dirt.

WARNING: clock gained xxx days -- CHECK AND RESET DATE! (SPARC based
systems only)
Description: This is an informational message.

Solution: Ignore the message and continue with the installation.

Not a UFS file system (x86 based systems only)

Cause: When Solaris 10 software was installed (either through the Solaris
installation program or custom JumpStart), no boot disk was selected. You now
must use the Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant diskette or edit the BIOS to
boot the system.

Solution: Follow these instructions:

■ Insert the Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant diskette into the system’s
boot diskette drive (usually drive A). For information about accessing the
Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant diskette, see Appendix C, “Preparing
to Boot From the Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant or the Network
(Tasks),” in Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations.
■ If you cannot use the bootable media, select the BIOS to boot. See your BIOS
documentation for instructions.

Booting From Media, General Problems

The system does not boot.
Description: When initially setting up a custom JumpStart server, you might
encounter boot problems that do not return an error message. To verify
information about the system and how the system is booting, run the boot
command with the -v option. When you use the -v option, the boot command
displays verbose debugging information about the screen.

Note – If this flag is not given, the messages are still printed, but the output is
directed to the system log file. For more information, see syslogd(1M).

Solution: For SPARC based systems, at the ok prompt, type the following
command.
ok boot net -v - install

For x86 based systems, when the installation program prompts you to “Select type
of installation,” type the following command.
b - -v install

Appendix A • Troubleshooting (Tasks) 191

 Boot from DVD media fails on systems with Toshiba SD—M 1401
DVD-ROM
Description: If your system has a Toshiba SD-M1401 DVD-ROM with firmware
revision 1007, the system cannot boot from the Solaris 10 Operating System DVD.

Solution: Apply patch 111649–03, or later version, to update the Toshiba SD-M1401
DVD-ROM drive’s firmware. The patch 111649–03 is available at sunsolve.sun.com.

The system hangs or panics when nonmemory PC cards are inserted.

(x86 based systems only)
Cause: Nonmemory PC cards cannot use the same memory resources that are used
by other devices.

Solution: To correct this problem, see the instructions for your PC card and check
for the address range.

The IDE BIOS primary drive on your system was not detected by the
Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant diskette during the
pre-booting phase. (x86 based systems only)
Solution: Follow these instructions:
■ If you are using old drives, they might be unsupported. Check your hardware
manufacturer’s documentation.
■ Make sure the ribbon and power cables are connected correctly. Check the
manufacturer’s documentation.
■ If only one drive is attached to the controller, designate the drive as the master
drive by setting jumpers. Some drives have different jumper settings for a single
master, as opposed to a master operating with a slave. Connect the drive to the
connector at the end of the cable to reduce signal ringing that occurs when an
unused connector is dangling at the end of the cable.
■ If two drives are attached to the controller, designate one drive as the master by
setting jumpers (or as a master operating with a slave), and set the second drive
as a slave by setting jumpers.
■ If one drive is a hard disk and the second a CD-ROM drive, designate one drive
as the slave drive by setting jumpers. You can designate either physical drive as
the slave drive.
■ If problems persist with two drives on a single controller, attach one drive at a
time to verify that each drive works. Designate the drive as master or single
master by setting jumpers, and use the drive connector at the end of the IDE
ribbon cable to attach the drive. Verify that each drive works, then set the
jumpers for the drives back to a master and slave configuration.
■ If the drive is a disk drive, use the BIOS setup utility to ensure that the drive
type (which indicates the number of cylinders, heads, and sectors) is configured
correctly. Some BIOS software might have a feature that automatically detects
the drive type.
■ If the drive is a CD-ROM drive, use the BIOS setup screen to configure the drive
type as a CD-ROM drive, provided the BIOS software offers this capability.

192 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 ■ For many systems, IDE CD-ROM drives are only recognized by MS-DOS if an
MS-DOS CD-ROM driver has been installed. Try another drive.

The IDE disk or CD-ROM drive on your system was not found by the
Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant diskette during the
pre-booting phase. (x86 based systems only)
Solution: Follow these instructions:
■ If disks are disabled in the BIOS, use the Solaris 10 Device Configuration
Assistant diskette to boot from the hard disk. For information about accessing
the Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant, see Appendix C, “Preparing to
Boot From the Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant or the Network
(Tasks),” in Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations.
■ If the system has no disks, it might be a diskless client.

The system hangs before displaying the system prompt. (x86 based
systems only)
Solution: You have hardware that is not supported. Check your hardware
manufacturer’s documentation.

Booting From the Network, Error Messages

WARNING: getfile: RPC failed: error 5 (RPC Timed out).
Description: This error occurs when you have two or more servers on a network
responding to an install client’s boot request. The install client connects to the
wrong boot server, and the installation hangs. The following specific reasons might
cause this error to occur:

Cause: Reason 1:/etc/bootparams files might exist on different servers with an

entry for this install client.

Solution: Reason 1: Ensure that servers on the network do not have multiple
/etc/bootparams entries for the install client. If they do have multiple entries,
remove duplicate client entries in the /etc/bootparams file on all install servers
and boot servers except the one you want the install client to use.

Cause: Reason 2: Multiple /tftpboot or /rplboot directory entries might exist

for this install client.

Solution: Reason 2: Ensure that servers on the network do not have multiple
/tftpboot or /rplboot directory entries for the install client. If they do have
multiple entries, remove duplicate client entries from the /tftpboot or
/rplboot directories on all install servers and boot servers except the one you
want the install client to use.

Cause: Reason 3: An install client entry might exist in the /etc/bootparams file
on a server and an entry in another /etc/bootparams file that enables all
systems to access the profile server. Such an entry resembles the following:

Appendix A • Troubleshooting (Tasks) 193

 * install_config=profile_server:path

A line that resembles the previous entry in the NIS or NIS+ bootparams table can
also cause this error.

Solution: Reason 3: If a wildcard entry is in the name service bootparams map or

table (for example, * install_config=), delete it and add it to the
/etc/bootparams file on the boot server.

No network boot server. Unable to install the system. See

installation instructions. (SPARC based systems only)
Cause: This error occurs on a system that you are attempting to install from the
network. The system is not set up correctly.

Solution: Ensure that you correctly set up the system to install from the network.
See “Adding Systems to Be Installed From the Network With a CD Image” in
Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Network-Based Installations.

prom_panic: Could not mount file system (SPARC based systems only)
Cause: This error occurs when you are installing Solaris from a network, but the
boot software cannot locate the following:
■ Solaris 10 Operating System DVD, either the DVD or a copy of the DVD image
on the install server
■ Solaris 10 Software - 1 CD image, either the Solaris 10 Software - 1 CD or a copy
of the CD image on the install server

Solution: Ensure that the installation software is mounted and shared.

■ If you are installing Solaris from the install server’s DVD-ROM or CD-ROM
drive, ensure that the Solaris 10 Operating System DVD or Solaris 10 Software -
1 CD is inserted in the CD-ROM drive, is mounted, and is shared in the
/etc/dfs/dfstab file.
■ If installing from a copy of the Solaris 10 Operating System DVD image or
Solaris 10 Software - 1 CD image on the install server’s disk, ensure that the
directory path to the copy is shared in the /etc/dfs/dfstab file.

Timeout waiting for ARP/RARP packet...(SPARC based systems only)

Cause: Reason 1: The client is trying to boot from the network, but it cannot find a
system that knows about the client.

Solution: Reason 1: Verify the system’s host name is in the NIS or NIS+ name
service. Also, verify the bootparams search order in the boot server’s
/etc/nsswitch.conf file.

For example, the following line in the /etc/nsswitch.conf file indicates that
JumpStart or the Solaris installation program first looks in the NIS maps for
bootparams information. If the program does not find any information, the
installer looks in the boot server’s /etc/bootparams file.

194 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 bootparams: nis files

Cause: Reason 2: The client’s Ethernet address is not correct.

Solution: Reason 2: Verify that the client’s Ethernet address in the install server’s
/etc/ethers file is correct.

Cause: Reason 3: In a custom JumpStart installation, the add_install_client

command specifies the platform group that uses a specified server as an install
server. If the wrong architecture value is used when using the
add_install_client, this problem occurs. For example, the machine you want
to install is a sun4u, but you used i86pc instead.

Solution: Reason 3: Rerun add_install_client with the correct architecture

value.

ip: joining multicasts failed on tr0 - will use link layer

broadcasts for multicast (x86 based systems only)
Cause: This error message is displayed when you boot a system with a token ring
card. Ethernet multicast and token ring multicast do not work the same way. The
driver returns this error message because an invalid multicast address was
provided to it.

Solution: Ignore this error message. If multicast does not work, IP uses layer
broadcasts instead and does not cause the installation to fail.

Requesting Internet address for Ethernet_Address (x86 based systems only)

Cause: The client is trying to boot from the network, but it cannot find a system
that knows about the client.

Solution: Verify the system’s host name is listed in the name service. If the system’s
host name is listed in the NIS or NIS+ name service, and the system continues to
print this error message, try rebooting.

RPC: Timed out No bootparams (whoami) server responding; still

trying... (x86 based systems only)
Cause: The client is trying to boot from the network, but it cannot find a system
with an entry in the /etc/bootparams file on the install server.

Solution: Use add_install_client on the install server. Using this command

adds the proper entry in the /etc/bootparams file, enabling the client to boot
from the network.

Still trying to find a RPL server... (x86 based systems only)

Cause: The system is trying to boot from the network, but the server is not set up
to boot this system.

Solution: On the install server, execute add_install_client for the system to be

installed. The add_install_client command sets up an /rplboot directory,
which contains the necessary network boot program.

Appendix A • Troubleshooting (Tasks) 195

 CLIENT MAC ADDR: FF FF FF FF FF FF (network installations with DHCP only)
Cause: The DHCP server is not configured correctly. This error might occur if the
options or macros are not correctly defined in the DHCP Manager software.

Solution: In the DHCP Manager software, verify that the options and macros are
correctly defined. Confirm that the Router option is defined, and that the value of
the Router option is correct for the subnet you are using for the network
installation.

Booting From the Network, General Problems

The system boots from the network, but from a system other than
the specified install server.
Cause: An /etc/bootparams and perhaps an /etc/ethers entry exist on
another system for the client.

Solution: On the name server, update the /etc/bootparams entry for the system
that is being installed. The entry should conform to the following syntax:
install_system root=boot_server:path install=install_server:path

Also, ensure that only one bootparams entry is on the subnet for the install client.

Initial Installation of the Solaris OS

Initial installation fails
Solution: If the Solaris installation fails, you must restart the installation. To restart
the installation, boot the system from the Solaris 10 Operating System DVD, the
Solaris 10 Software - 1 CD, or from the network.

You cannot uninstall the Solaris software after the software has been partially
installed. You must restore your system from a backup or begin the Solaris
installation process again.

/cdrom/Solaris_10/SUNWxxxx/reloc.cpio: Broken pipe

Description: This error message is informational and does not affect the installation.
The condition occurs when a write on a pipe does not have a reading process.

Solution: Ignore the message and continue with the installation.

WARNING: CHANGE DEFAULT BOOT DEVICE (x86 based systems only)

Cause: This is an informational message. The default boot device set in the
system’s BIOS might be set to a device that requires you to use the Solaris 10
Device Configuration Assistant diskette to boot the system.

196 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 Solution: Continue with the installation and, if necessary, change the system’s
default boot device specified in the BIOS after you install the Solaris software to a
device that does not require the Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant diskette.

▼ x86: To Check IDE Disk for Bad Blocks

IDE disk drives do not automatically map out bad blocks like other drives supported
by Solaris software. Before installing Solaris on an IDE disk, you might want to
perform a surface analysis on the disk. To perform surface analysis on an IDE disk,
follow this procedure.

Steps 1. Boot to the installation media in single-user mode.

# b -s

2. Start the format(1M) program.

# format

3. Specify the IDE disk drive on which you want to perform a surface analysis.
# cxdy

cx Is the controller number

dy Is the device number

4. Determine if you have an fdisk partition.

■ If a Solaris fdisk partition already exists, proceed to Step 5.
■ If a Solaris fdisk partition does not exist, use the fdisk command to create a
Solaris partition on the disk.
format> fdisk

5. To begin the surface analysis, type:

format> analyze

6. Determine the current settings, type:

analyze> config

7. (Optional) To change settings, type:

analyze> setup

8. To find bad blocks, type:

analyze> type_of_surface_analysis

type_of_surface_analysis Is read, write, or compare

Appendix A • Troubleshooting (Tasks) 197

 If format finds bad blocks, it remaps them.

9. To exit the analysis, type:

analyze> quit

10. Determine if you want to specify blocks to remap.

■ If no, go to Step 11.
■ If yes, type:
format> repair

11. To exit the format program, type:

quit

12. To restart the media in multiuser mode, type:

ok b

Upgrading the Solaris OS

Upgrading, Error Messages

No upgradable disks
Cause: A swap entry in the /etc/vfstab file is causing the upgrade to fail.

Solution: Comment out the following lines in the /etc/vfstab file:

■ All swap files and slices on disks not being upgraded
■ Swap files that are no longer present
■ Any unused swap slices

usr/bin/bzczt not found

Cause: Solaris Live Upgrade fails because of needing a patch cluster.

Solution: A patch is needed to install Solaris Live Upgrade. Go to sunsolve.sun.com

for the patch.

198 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
Upgradeable Solaris root devices were found, however, no suitable
partitions to hold the Solaris install software were found.
Upgrading using the Solaris Installer is not possible. It might be
possible to upgrade using the Solaris Software 1 CDROM. (x86 based
systems only)
Cause: You cannot upgrade with Solaris 10 Software - 1 because you do not have
enough space.

Solution: To upgrade, you can either create a swap slice that is larger than or equal
to 512 Mbytes or use another method of upgrading such as the Solaris installation
program from Solaris 10 Operating System DVD, a net installation image, or
JumpStart.

Upgrading, General Problems

The upgrade option is not presented even though there is a version
of Solaris software that’s upgradable on the system.
Cause: Reason 1: The /var/sadm directory is a symlink or it is mounted from
another file system.

Solution: Reason 1: Move the /var/sadm directory into the root (/) or /var file
system.

Cause: Reason 2: The /var/sadm/softinfo/INST_RELEASE file is missing.

Solution: Reason 2: Create a new INST_RELEASE file by using the following

template:
OS=Solaris
VERSION=x
REV=0

x
Is the version of Solaris software on the system

Cause: Reason 3: SUNWusr is missing from /var/sadm/softinfo.

Solution: Solution 3: You need to do an initial installation. The Solaris software is

not upgradable.

Couldn’t shut down or initialize the md driver

Solution: Follow these instructions:
■ If the file system is not a RAID-1 volume, comment out in the vsftab file.
■ If the file system is a RAID-1 volume, break the mirror and reinstall. For
information about unmirroring, see “Removing RAID-1 Volumes
(Unmirroring)” in Solaris Volume Manager Administration Guide.

Appendix A • Troubleshooting (Tasks) 199

 The upgrade fails because the Solaris installation program cannot
mount a file system.
Cause: During an upgrade, the script attempts to mount all the file systems that are
listed in the system’s /etc/vfstab file on the root (/) file system that is being
upgraded. If the installation script cannot mount a file system, it fails and exits.

Solution: Ensure that all file systems in the system’s /etc/vfstab file can be
mounted. Comment out any file systems in the /etc/vfstab file that cannot be
mounted or that might cause the problem so that the Solaris installation program
does not try to mount them during the upgrade. Any system-based file systems
that contain software to be upgraded (for example, /usr) cannot be commented
out.

The upgrade fails

Description: The system does not have enough space for the upgrade.

Cause: Check “Upgrading With Disk Space Reallocation” on page 31 for the space
problem and see if you can fix it without using auto-layout to reallocate space.

Problems upgrading RAID—1 volume root (/) file systems

Solution: If you have problems upgrading when using Solaris Volume Manager
RAID-1 volumes that are the root (/) file system, see Chapter 25, “Troubleshooting
Solaris Volume Manager (Tasks),” in Solaris Volume Manager Administration Guide.

▼ To Continue Upgrading After a Failed Upgrade

The upgrade fails and the system cannot be soft-booted. The failure is for reasons
beyond your control, such as a power failure or a network connection failure.

Steps 1. Reboot the system from the Solaris 10 Operating System DVD, the Solaris 10
Software - 1 CD, or from the network.

2. Choose the upgrade option for installation.

The Solaris installation program determines if the system has been partially
upgraded and continues the upgrade.

▼ System Panics When Upgrading With Solaris Live

Upgrade Running Veritas VxVm
When you use Solaris Live Upgrade while upgrading and running Veritas VxVM, the
system panics on reboot unless you upgrade by using the following procedure. The
problem occurs if packages do not conform to Solaris advanced packaging guidelines.

Steps 1. Create an inactive boot environment. See “Creating a New Boot Environment”
in Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Solaris Live Upgrade and Upgrade Planning.

200 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
2. Before upgrading the inactive boot environment, you must disable the existing
Veritas software on the inactive boot environment.

a. Mount the inactive boot environment.

# lumount inactive_boot_environment_name mount_point
For example:
# lumount solaris8 /.alt.12345

b. Change to the directory that contains the vfstab, for example:

# cd /.alt.12345/etc

c. Make a copy of the inactive boot environment’s vfstab file, for example:
# cp vfstab vfstab.501

d. In the copied vfstab, comment out all Veritas file system entries, for
example:
# sed ’/vx\/dsk/s/^/#/g’ < vfstab > vfstab.novxfs
The first character of each line is changed to #, which makes the line a comment
line. Note that this comment line is different than the system file-comment lines.

e. Copy the changed vfstab file, for example:

# cp vfstab.novxfs vfstab

f. Change directories to the inactive boot environment’s system file, for

example:
# cd /.alt.12345/etc

g. Make a copy of the inactive boot environment’s system file, for example:
# cp system system.501

h. Comment out all “forceload:” entries that include drv/vx.

# sed ’/forceload: drv\/vx/s/^/*/’ <system> system.novxfs
The first character of each line is changed to *, which makes the line a command
line. Note that this comment line is different than the vfstab file comment
lines.

i. Change directories to the install-db file on the inactive boot environment,

for example:
# cd /.alt.12345/etc

j. Create the Veritas install-db file, for example:

# touch vx/reconfig.d/state.d/install-db

Appendix A • Troubleshooting (Tasks) 201

 k. Unmount the inactive boot environment.
# luumount inactive_boot_environment_name mount_point

3. Upgrade the inactive boot environment. See Chapter 7, “Upgrading With Solaris
Live Upgrade (Tasks),” in Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Solaris Live Upgrade and
Upgrade Planning.

4. Activate the inactive boot environment. See “Activating a Boot Environment” in

Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Solaris Live Upgrade and Upgrade Planning.

5. Shut down the system.

# init 0

6. Boot the inactive boot environment in single-user mode:

OK boot -s
Several messages and error messages that contain “vxvm” or “VXVM” are
displayed that can be ignored. The inactive boot environment becomes active.

7. Upgrade Veritas.

a. Remove the Veritas VRTSvmsa package from the system, for example:
# pkgrm VRTSvmsa

b. Change directories to the Veritas packages.

# cd /location_of_Veritas_software

c. Add the latest Veritas packages to the system:

#pkgadd -d ‘pwd‘ VRTSvxvm VRTSvmsa VRTSvmdoc VRTSvmman VRTSvmdev

8. Restore the original vfstab and system files:

# cp /etc/vfstab.original /etc/vfstab
# cp /etc/system.original /etc/system

9. Reboot the system.

# init 6

x86: Service Partition Not Created by Default on

Systems With No Existing Service Partition
If you install the Solaris 10 OS on a system that does not currently include a service or
diagnostic partition, the installation program might not create a service partition by
default. If you want to include a service partition on the same disk as the Solaris
partition, you must re-create the service partition before you install the Solaris 10 OS.

202 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 If you installed the Solaris 8 2/02 OS on a system with a service partition, the
installation program might not have preserved the service partition. If you did not
manually edit the fdisk boot partition layout to preserve the service partition, the
installation program deleted the service partition during the installation.

Note – If you did not specifically preserve the service partition when you installed the
Solaris 8 2/02 OS, you might not be able to re-create the service partition and upgrade
to the Solaris 10 OS.

If you want to include a service partition on the disk that contains the Solaris partition,
choose one of the following workarounds.

▼ To Install Software From a Network Installation

Image or From the Solaris 10 Operating System
DVD
To install the software from a net installation image or from the Solaris 10 Operating
System DVD over the network, follow these steps.

Steps 1. Delete the contents of the disk.

2. Before you install, create the service partition by using the diagnostics CD for
your system.
For information about how to create the service partition, see your hardware
documentation.

3. Boot the system from the network.

The Customize fdisk Partitions screen is displayed.

4. To load the default boot disk partition layout, click Default.

The installation program preserves the service partition and creates the x86 boot
partition and the Solaris partition.

▼ To Install From the Solaris 10 Software - 1 CD or

From a Network Installation Image
To use the Solaris installation program to install from the Solaris 10 Software - 1 CD or
from a network installation image on a boot server, follow these steps.

Steps 1. Delete the contents of the disk.

Appendix A • Troubleshooting (Tasks) 203

 2. Before you install, create the service partition by using the diagnostics CD for
your system.
For information about how to create the service partition, see your hardware
documentation.

3. The installation program prompts you to choose a method for creating the
Solaris partition.

4. Boot the system.

5. Select the Use rest of disk for Solaris partition option.

The installation program preserves the service partition and creates the Solaris
partition.

6. Complete the installation.

204 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
APPENDIX B

Additional SVR4 Packaging

Requirements (Reference)

This appendix is for system administrators who install or remove packages, especially
third-party packages. Following these packaging requirements enables the following:
■ Avoids modifying the currently running system so you can upgrade with Solaris
Live Upgrade and create and maintain non-global zones and diskless clients
■ Prevents a package from being interactive to automate installations when using
installation programs such as custom JumpStart

This chapter contains the following sections:

■ “Preventing Modification of the Current Solaris OS” on page 205
■ “Preventing User Interaction When Installing or Upgrading” on page 209

Preventing Modification of the Current

Solaris OS
Following the requirements in this section keeps the currently running Solaris OS
unaltered.

Using Absolute Paths

For an installation of an operating system to be successful, packages must recognize
and correctly interact with alternate root (/) file systems, such as a Solaris Live
Upgrade inactive boot environment.

205
 Packages can include absolute paths in their pkgmap file (package map). If these files
exist, they are written relative to the -R option of the pkgadd command. Packages
that contain both absolute and relative (relocatable) paths can be installed on an
alternative root (/) as well. $PKG_INSTALL_ROOT is prepended to both absolute and
relocatable files so all paths are resolved properly when being installed by pkgadd.

Using the pkgadd -R Command

Packages being installed by using the pkgadd -R option or being removed by using
the pkgrm -R option must not alter the currently running system. This feature is used
by custom JumpStart, Solaris Live Upgrade, non-global zones, and diskless client.

Any procedure scripts that are included in the packages being installed with the
pkgadd command -R option or being removed by using the pkgrm command -R
option must not alter the currently running system. Any installation scripts that you
provide must reference any directory or file that is prefixed with the
$PKG_INSTALL_ROOT variable. The package must write all directories and files with
the $PKG_INSTALL_ROOT prefix. The package must not remove directories without a
$PKG_INSTALL_ROOT prefix.

Table B–1 provides examples of script syntax.

TABLE B–1 Examples of Installation Script Syntax

Script Type Correct Syntax Incorrect Syntax

Bourne shell “if”

if [ -f ${PKG_INSTALL_ROOT}\ if [ -f /etc/myproduct.conf ] ; \
statement
/etc/myproduct.conf ] ; then then
fragments

Removing a file
/bin/rm -f ${PKG_INSTALL_ROOT}\ /bin/rm -f /etc/myproduct.conf
/etc/myproduct.conf

Changing a file
echo "test=no" > ${PKG_INSTALL_ROOT}\ echo "test=no" > \
/etc/myproduct.conf /etc/myproduct.conf

Differences Between $PKG_INSTALL_ROOT and

$BASEDIR Overview
$PKG_INSTALL_ROOT is the location of the root (/) file system of the machine to
which you are adding the package. The location is set to the -R argument of the
pkgadd command. For example, if the following command is invoked, then
$PKG_INSTALL_ROOT becomes /a during the installation of the package.
# pkgadd -R /a SUNWvxvm

206 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 $BASEDIR points to the relocatable base directory into which relocatable package
objects are installed. Only relocatable objects are installed here. Nonrelocatable objects
(those that have absolute paths in the pkgmap file) are always installed relative to the
inactive boot environment, but not relative to the $BASEDIR in effect. If a package has
no relocatable objects, then the package is said to be an absolute package (or
nonrelocatable), and $BASEDIR is undefined and not available to package procedure
scripts.

For example, suppose a package’s pkgmap file has two entries:

1 f none sbin/ls 0555 root sys 3541 12322 1002918510
1 f none /sbin/ls2 0555 root sys 3541 12322 2342423332

The pkginfo file has a specification for $BASEDIR:

BASEDIR=/opt

If this package is installed with the following command, then ls is installed in

/a/opt/sbin/ls, but ls2 is installed as /a/sbin/ls2.
# pkgadd -R /a SUNWtest

Guidelines for Writing Scripts

Your package procedure scripts must be independent of the currently running Solaris
OS to prevent modifying the Solaris OS. Procedure scripts define actions that occur at
particular points during package installation and removal. Four procedure scripts can
be created with these predefined names: preinstall, postinstall, preremove,
and postremove.

TABLE B–2 Guidelines for Creating Scripts

Solaris Live Non-global

Upgrade Zones
Guidelines Impact Impact

Scripts must be written in Bourne shell (/bin/sh). Bourne shell is the interpreter that is X X
used by the pkgadd command to execute the procedure scripts.

Scripts must not start or stop any processes or depend on the output of commands such X X
as ps or truss, which are operating-system dependent and report information about
the currently running system.

Scripts are free to use other standard UNIX commands such as expr, cp, and ls and X X
other commands that facilitate shell scripting.

Appendix B • Additional SVR4 Packaging Requirements (Reference) 207

TABLE B–2 Guidelines for Creating Scripts (Continued)
Solaris Live Non-global
Upgrade Zones
Guidelines Impact Impact

Any commands that a script invokes must be available in all releases from Solaris 7 or X
later, since a package must run on all of those releases. Therefore, you cannot use
commands that were added or removed after the Solaris 7 release. For example, the
pgrep command cannot be used, because this command was added in the Solaris 8
release and not available in the Solaris 7 release.
To verify that a specific command or option is supported in a Solaris 7 or later release,
see the specific version of Solaris Reference Manual AnswerBook on http://docs.sun.com.

Maintaining Diskless Client Compatibility

Packages must not execute commands that the package itself delivers. This
requirement is to maintain diskless client compatibility and avoids running
commands that might require shared libraries that are not installed yet.

Verifying Packages
All packages must pass pkgchk validation. After a package is created and before it is
installed, it must be checked with the following command.
# pkgchk -d dir_name pkg_name

dir_name Specifies the name of the directory where the package resides
pkg_name Specifies the name of the package

EXAMPLE B–1 Testing a Package

After a package is created, it must be tested by installing it in an alternate root (/)

location by using the -R dir_name option to pkgadd. After the package is installed, it
must be checked for correctness by using pkgchk, as in this example.
# pkgadd -d . -R /a SUNWvxvm
# pkgchk -R /a SUNWvxvm

No errors should be displayed.

EXAMPLE B–2 Testing a Package on /export/SUNWvxvm

If a package exists at /export/SUNWvxvm, then you would issue the following

command.
# pkgchk -d /export SUNWvxvm

No errors should be displayed.

208 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
Other commands can check the package when you are creating, modifying, and
deleting files. The following commands are some examples.
■ For example, the dircmp or fssnap commands can be used to verify that
packages behave properly.
■ Also, the ps command can be used for testing daemon compliance by making sure
daemons are not stopped or started by the package.
■ The truss, pkgadd -v, and pkgrm commands can test runtime package
installation compliance, but might not work in all situations. In the following
example, the truss command strips out all read-only, non-$TEMPDIR access. The
command shows only non-read-only access to paths that do not lie within the
specified inactive boot environment.
# TEMPDIR=/a; export TEMPDIR
# truss -t open /usr/sbin/pkgadd -R ${TEMPDIR} SUNWvxvm \
2>&1 > /dev/null | grep -v O_RDONLY | grep -v \
’open("’${TEMPDIR}

Preventing User Interaction When

Installing or Upgrading
Packages must be added or removed without the user being prompted for information
when using the following standard Solaris utilities.
■ The custom JumpStart program
■ Solaris Live Upgrade
■ Solaris installation program
■ Solaris Zones

To test a package to ensure that it will install with no user interaction, a new
administration file can be set up with the pkgadd command -a option. The -a option
defines an installation administration file to be used in place of the default
administration file. Using the default file might result in the user being prompted for
more information. You can create an administration file that indicates to pkgadd that
it should bypass these checks and install the package without user confirmation. For
details, see the man page admin(4) or pkgadd(1M).

The following examples show how the pkgadd command uses the administration file.
■ If no administration file is provided, pkgadd uses
/var/sadm/install/admin/default. Using this file might result in user
interaction.
# pkgadd

Appendix B • Additional SVR4 Packaging Requirements (Reference) 209

 ■ If a relative administration file is provided on the command line, pkgadd looks in
/var/sadm/install/admin for the file name and uses it. In this example, the
relative administration file is named nocheck and pkgadd looks for
/var/sadm/install/admin/nocheck.
# pkgadd -a nocheck
■ If an absolute file is provided, pkgadd uses it. In this example, pkgadd looks in
/tmp for the nocheck administration file.
# pkgadd -a /tmp/nocheck

EXAMPLE B–3 Installation Administration File

The following is an example of an installation administration file that requires very

little user interaction with the pkgadd utility. Unless the package requires more space
than is available on the system, the pkgadd utility uses this file and installs the
package without prompting the user for more information.
mail=
instance=overwrite
partial=nocheck
runlevel=nocheck
idepend=nocheck
space=ask
setuid=nocheck
confiict=nocheck
action=nocheck
basedir=default

For More Information

The following references provide background information about packaging
requirements and specific command syntax.

For more specific information Chapter 6, “Advanced Techniques for Creating Packages,” in
about packaging requirements Application Packaging Developer’s Guide
and definitions of terminology

For basic information about Chapter 15, “Managing Software (Overview),” in System
adding and removing Administration Guide: Basic Administration
packages and the installation
administration file

210 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
For detailed information about dircmp(1), fssnap(1M), ps(1), or truss(1) pkgadd(1M),
specific commands that are pkgchk(1M), or pkgrm(1M)
referenced in this appendix

For an overview of Solaris Live Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Solaris Live Upgrade and Upgrade
Upgrade Planning

For an overview of custom Chapter 3

JumpStart

For an overview of Solaris Chapter 16, “Introduction to Solaris Zones,” in System

Zones Administration Guide: Solaris Containers—Resource Management
and Solaris Zones

Appendix B • Additional SVR4 Packaging Requirements (Reference) 211

212 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 Glossary

3DES ([Triple DES] Triple-Data Encryption Standard). A symmetric-key

encryption method that provides a key length of 168 bits.
AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) A symmetric 128-bit block data
encryption technique. The U.S. government adopted the Rijndael
variant of the algorithm as its encryption standard in October 2000.
AES replaces DES encryption as the government standard.
archive A file that contains a collection of files that were copied from a master
system. The file also contains identification information about the
archive, such as a name and the date that you created the archive.
After you install an archive on a system, the system contains the exact
configuration of the master system.

An archive could be a differential archive, which is a Solaris Flash

archive that contains only the differences between two system images,
an unchanged master image and an updated master image. The
differential archive contains files to be retained, modified, or deleted
from the clone system. A differential update changes only the files
specified and is restricted to systems that contain software consistent
with the unchanged master image.
arrow keys One of the four directional keys on the numeric keypad.
begin script A user-defined Bourne shell script, specified within the rules file, that
performs tasks before the Solaris software is installed on the system.
You can use begin scripts only with custom JumpStart installations.
boot To load the system software into memory and start it.
boot environment A collection of mandatory file systems (disk slices and mount points)
that are critical to the operation of the Solaris OS. These disk slices
might be on the same disk or distributed across multiple disks.

213
 The active boot environment is the one that is currently booted.
Exactly one active boot environment can be booted. An inactive boot
environment is not currently booted, but can be in a state of waiting
for activation on the next reboot.
bootlog-cgi The CGI program that enables a web server to collect and store remote
client-booting and installation console messages during a WAN boot
installation.
boot server A server system that provides client systems on the same network
subnet with the programs and information that they need to start. A
boot server is required to install over the network if the install server is
on a different subnet than the systems on which Solaris software is to
be installed.
certificate authority (CA) A trusted third-party organization or company that issues digital
certificates that are used to create digital signatures and public-private
key pairs. The CA guarantees that the individual who is granted the
unique certificate is who she or he claims to be.
certstore A file that contains a digital certificate for a specific client system.
During an SSL negotiation, the client might be asked to provide the
certificate file to the server. The server uses this file to verify the
identity of the client.
CGI (Common Gateway Interface) An interface by which external
programs communicate with the HTTP server. Programs that are
written to use CGI are called CGI programs or CGI scripts. CGI
programs handle forms or parse output the server does not normally
handle or parse.
checksum The result of adding a group of data items that are used for checking
the group. The data items can be either numerals or other character
strings that are treated as numerals during the checksum calculation.
The checksum value verifies that communication between two devices
is successful.
client In the client-server model for communications, the client is a process
that remotely accesses resources of a compute server, such as compute
power and large memory capacity.
clone system A system that you installed by using a Solaris Flash archive. The clone
system has the same installation configuration as the master system.
cluster A logical collection of packages (software modules). The Solaris
software is divided into software groups, which are each composed of
clusters and packages.
command line A string of characters that begins with a command, often followed by
arguments, including options, file names, and other expressions, and
terminated by the end-of-line character.

214 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
concatenation A RAID-0 volume. If slices are concatenated, the data is written to the
first available slice until that slice is full. When that slice is full, the
data is written to the next slice, serially. A concatenation provides no
data redundancy unless it is contained in a mirror. See also RAID-0
volume.
Core Software Group A software group that contains the minimum software that is required
to boot and run the Solaris OS on a system. Core includes some
networking software and the drivers that are required to run the
Common Desktop Environment (CDE) desktop. Core does not include
the CDE software.
critical file systems File systems that are required by the Solaris OS. When you use Solaris
Live Upgrade, these file systems are separate mount points in the
vfstab of the active and inactive boot environments. Examples are
root (/), /usr, /var, and /opt. These file systems are always copied
from the source to the inactive boot environment.
custom JumpStart A type of installation in which the Solaris software is automatically
installed on a system that is based on a user-defined profile. You can
create customized profiles for different types of users and systems. A
custom JumpStart installation is a JumpStart installation you create.
custom probes file A file, which must be located in the same JumpStart directory as the
rules file, that is a Bourne shell script that contains two types of
functions: probe and comparison. Probe functions gather the
information you want or do the actual work and set a corresponding
SI_ environment variable you define. Probe functions become probe
keywords. Comparison functions call a corresponding probe function,
compare the output of the probe function, and return 0 if the keyword
matches or 1 if the keyword doesn’t match. Comparison functions
become rule keywords. See also rules file.
decryption The process of converting coded data to plain text. See also encryption.
derived profile A profile that is dynamically created by a begin script during a custom
JumpStart installation.
DES (Data Encryption Standard) A symmetric-key encryption method that
was developed in 1975 and standardized by ANSI in 1981 as ANSI
X.3.92. DES uses a 56-bit key.
Developer Solaris A software group that contains the End User Solaris Software Group
Software Group plus the libraries, include files, man pages, and programming tools for
developing software.

215
 DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) An application-layer protocol.
Enables individual computers, or clients, on a TCP/IP network to
extract an IP address and other network configuration information
from a designated and centrally maintained DHCP server or servers.
This facility reduces the overhead of maintaining and administering a
large IP network.
differential archive A Solaris Flash archive that contains only the differences between two
system images, an unchanged master image and an updated master
image. The differential archive contains files to be retained, modified,
or deleted from the clone system. A differential update changes only
the files that are specified and is restricted to systems that contain
software consistent with the unchanged master image.
digital certificate A nontransferable, nonforgeable, digital file issued from a third party
that both communicating parties already trust.
disc An optical disc, as opposed to a magnetic disk, which recognizes the
common spelling that is used in the compact disc (CD) market. For
example, a CD-ROM or DVD-ROM is an optical disc.
disk A round platter, or set of platters, of a magnetized medium that is
organized into concentric tracks and sectors for storing data such as
files. See also disc.
disk configuration file A file that represents a structure of a disk (for example, bytes/sector,
flags, slices). Disk configuration files enable you to use pfinstall
from a single system to test profiles on different–size disks.
diskless client A client on a network that relies on a server for all of its disk storage.
document root directory The root of a hierarchy on a web server machine that contains the files,
images, and data you want to present to users who are accessing the
web server.
domain A part of the Internet naming hierarchy. A domain represents a group
of systems on a local network that share administrative files.
domain name The name that is assigned to a group of systems on a local network
that share administrative files. The domain name is required for the
Network Information Service (NIS) database to work properly. A
domain name consists of a sequence of component names that are
separated by periods (for example: tundra.mpk.ca.us). As you read
a domain name from left to right, the component names identify more
general (and usually remote) areas of administrative authority.
encryption The process of protecting information from unauthorized use by
making the information unintelligible. Encryption is based on a code,
called a key, which is used to decrypt the information. See also
decryption.

216 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
End User Solaris A software group that contains the Core Software Group plus the
Software Group recommended software for an end user, including the Common
Desktop Environment (CDE) and DeskSet software.
Entire Solaris Software A software group that contains the entire Solaris 10 release.
Group
Entire Solaris Software A software group that contains the entire Solaris 10 release, plus
Group Plus OEM additional hardware support for OEMs. This software group is
Support recommended when installing Solaris software on SPARC based
servers.
/etc A directory that contains critical system configuration files and
maintenance commands.
/etc/netboot The directory on a WAN boot server that contains the client
directory configuration information and security data that are required for a
WAN boot installation.
/export A file system on an OS server that is shared with other systems on a
network. For example, the /export file system can contain the root
file system and swap space for diskless clients and the home
directories for users on the network. Diskless clients rely on the
/export file system on an OS server to boot and run.
fallback A reversion to the environment that ran previously. Use fallback when
you are activating an environment and the boot environment that is
designated for booting fails or shows some undesirable behavior.
fdisk partition A logical partition of a disk drive that is dedicated to a particular
operating system on x86 based systems. To install the Solaris software,
you must set up at least one Solaris fdisk partition on an x86 based
system. x86 based systems allow up to four different fdisk partitions
on a disk. These partitions can be used to hold individual operating
systems. Each operating system must be located on a unique fdisk
partition. A system can only have one Solaris fdisk partition per disk.
file server A server that provides the software and file storage for systems on a
network.
file system In the SunOS™ operating system, a tree-structured network of files
and directories that you can access.
finish script A user-defined Bourne shell script, specified within the rules file, that
performs tasks after the Solaris software is installed on the system, but
before the system reboots. You use finish scripts with custom
JumpStart installations.
format To put data into a structure or divide a disk into sectors for receiving
data.
function key One of the 10 or more keyboard keys that are labeled F1, F2, F3, and so
on that are mapped to particular tasks.

217
 global zone In Solaris Zones, the global zone is both the default zone for the
system and the zone used for system-wide administrative control. The
global zone is the only zone from which a non-global zone can be
configured, installed, managed, or uninstalled. Administration of the
system infrastructure, such as physical devices, routing, or dynamic
reconfiguration (DR), is only possible in the global zone. Appropriately
privileged processes running in the global zone can access objects
associated with other zones. See also Solaris Zones and non-global zone.
hard link A directory entry that references a file on disk. More than one such
directory entry can reference the same physical file.
hash A number that is produced by taking some input and generating a
number that is significantly shorter than the input. The same output
value is always generated for identical inputs. Hash functions can be
used in table search algorithms, in error detection, and in tamper
detection. When used for tamper detection, hash functions are chosen
such that it is difficult to find two inputs that yield the same hash
result. MD5 and SHA-1 are examples of one-way hash functions. For
example, a message digest takes a variable-length input such as a disk
file and reduces it to a small value.
hashing The process of changing a string of characters into a value or key that
represents the original string.
HMAC Keyed hashing method for message authentication. HMAC is used
with an iterative cryptographic hash function, such as MD5 or SHA-1,
in combination with a secret shared key. The cryptographic strength of
HMAC depends on the properties of the underlying hash function.
host name The name by which a system is known to other systems on a network.
This name must be unique among all the systems within a particular
domain (usually, this means within any single organization). A host
name can be any combination of letters, numbers, and minus signs (-),
but it cannot begin or end with a minus sign.
HTTP (Hypertext Transfer Protocol) (n.) The Internet protocol that fetches
hypertext objects from remote hosts. This protocol is based on TCP/IP.
HTTPS A secure version of HTTP, implemented by using the Secure Sockets
Layer (SSL).
initial installation An installation that overwrites the currently running software or
initializes a blank disk.

An initial installation of the Solaris OS overwrites the system’s disk or

disks with the new version of the Solaris OS. If your system is not
running the Solaris OS, you must perform an initial installation. If
your system is running an upgradable version of the Solaris OS, an
initial installation overwrites the disk and does not preserve the OS or
local modifications.

218 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
install server A server that provides the Solaris DVD or CD images from which
other systems on a network can install Solaris (also known as a media
server). You can create an install server by copying the Solaris DVD or
CD images to the server’s hard disk.
IP address (Internet protocol address) In TCP/IP, a unique 32-bit number that
identifies each host in a network. An IP address consists of four
numbers that are separated by periods (192.168.0.0, for example). Most
often, each part of the IP address is a number between 0 and 225.
However, the first number must be less than 224 and the last number
cannot be 0.

IP addresses are logically divided into two parts: the network (similar
to a telephone area code), and the local system on the network (similar
to a phone number). The numbers in a Class A IP address, for example,
represent “network.local.local.local” and the numbers in a
Class C IP address represent “network.network.network.local.”

Number of Available IP
Class Range (xxx is a number 0 to 255) Addresses

Class A 1.xxx.xxx.xxx - 126.xxx.xxx.xxx Over 16 million

Class B 128.0.xxx.xxx - 191.255.xxx.xxx Over 65,000

Class C 192.0.0.xxx - 223.255.255.xxx 256

IPv6 IPv6 is a version (version 6) of Internet Protocol (IP) that is designed to

be an evolutionary step from the current version, IPv4 (version 4).
Deploying IPv6, by using defined transition mechanisms, does not
disrupt current operations. In addition, IPv6 provides a platform for
new Internet functionality.

IPv6 is described in more detail in Part I, “Introducing System

Administration: IP Services,” in System Administration Guide: IP
Services.
job A user-defined task to be completed by a computer system.
JumpStart directory When you use a profile diskette for custom JumpStart installations, the
JumpStart directory is the root directory on the diskette that contains
all the essential custom JumpStart files. When you use a profile server
for custom JumpStart installations, the JumpStart directory is a
directory on the server that contains all the essential custom JumpStart
files.
JumpStart installation A type of installation in which the Solaris software is automatically
installed on a system by using the factory-installed JumpStart
software.

219
 Kerberos A network authentication protocol that uses strong, secret-key
cryptography to enable a client and server to identify themselves to
each other over an insecure network connection.
key The code for encrypting or decrypting data. See also encryption.
keystore A file that contains keys shared by a client and server. During a WAN
boot installation, the client system uses the keys to verify the integrity
of, or decrypt the data and files transmitted from, the server.
LAN (local area network) A group of computer systems in close proximity
that can communicate by way of some connecting hardware and
software.
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) A standard, extensible
directory access protocol that is used by LDAP naming service clients
and servers to communicate with each other.
locale A geographic or political region or community that shares the same
language, customs, or cultural conventions (English for the U.S. is
en_US, and English for the U.K. is en_UK).
logical device A group of physical slices on one or more disks that appear to the
system as a single device. A logical device is called a volume in Solaris
Volume Manager. A volume is functionally identical to a physical disk
in the view of an application or file system.
manifest section A section of a Solaris Flash archive that is used to validate a clone
system. The manifest section lists the files on a system to be retained,
added to, or deleted from the clone system. This section is
informational only. The section lists the files in an internal format and
cannot be used for scripting.
master system A system that you use to create a Solaris Flash archive. The system
configuration is saved in the archive.
MD5 (Message Digest 5) An iterative cryptographic hash function that is
used for message authentication, including digital signatures. The
function was developed in 1991 by Rivest.
media server See install server.
metadevice See volume.
miniroot The smallest possible bootable Solaris root file system. A miniroot
contains a kernel and just enough software to install the Solaris
environment on a hard disk. The miniroot is the file system that is
copied to a machine in the initial installation.
mirror See RAID-1 volume.

220 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
mount The process of accessing a directory from a disk that is attached to a
machine that is making the mount request or a remote disk on a
network. To mount a file system, you need a mount point on the local
system and the name of the file system to be mounted (for example,
/usr).
mount point A workstation directory to which you mount a file system that exists
on a remote machine.
name server A server that provides a name service to systems on a network.
name service A distributed network database that contains key system information
about all the systems on a network so that the systems can
communicate with each other. With a name service, the system
information can be maintained, managed, and accessed on a
network-wide basis. Without a name service, each system has to
maintain its own copy of the system information in the local /etc
files. Sun supports the following name services: LDAP, NIS, and NIS+.
networked systems A group of systems (called hosts) that are connected through hardware
and software so that they can communicate and share information.
Referred to as a local area network (LAN). One or more servers are
usually needed when systems are networked.
network installation A way to install software over the network—from a system with a
CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive to a system without a CD-ROM or
DVD-ROM drive. Network installations require a name server and an
install server.
NIS The SunOS 4.0 (minimum) Network Information Service. A distributed
network database that contains key information about the systems and
the users on the network. The NIS database is stored on the master
server and all the slave servers.
NIS+ The SunOS 5.0 (minimum) Network Information Service. NIS+
replaces NIS, the SunOS 4.0 (minimum) Network Information Service.
non-global zone A virtualized operating system environment created within a single
instance of the Solaris Operating System. One or more applications can
run in a non-global zone without interacting with the rest of the
system. Non-global zones are also called zones. See also Solaris Zones
and global zone.
nonnetworked systems Systems that are not connected to a network or do not rely on other
systems.
/opt A file system that contains the mount points for third-party and
unbundled software.

221
 OS server A system that provides services to systems on a network. To serve
diskless clients, an OS server must have disk space set aside for each
diskless client’s root file system and swap space (/export/root,
/export/swap).
package A collection of software that is grouped into a single entity for
modular installation. The Solaris software is divided into software
groups, which are each composed of clusters and packages.
panel A container for organizing the contents of a window, a dialog box, or
applet. The panel might collect and confirm user input. Panels might
be used by wizards and follow an ordered sequence to fulfill a
designated task.
patch analyzer A script that you can run manually or as part of the Solaris installation
program. The patch analyzer performs an analysis on your system to
determine which (if any) patches will be removed by upgrading to a
Solaris update.
platform group A vendor-defined grouping of hardware platforms for the purpose of
distributing specific software. Examples of valid platform groups are
i86pc and sun4u.
platform name The output of the uname -i command. For example, the platform
name for the Ultra 60 is SUNW,Ultra-60.
Power Management Software that automatically saves the state of a system and turns it off
after it is idle for 30 minutes. When you install the Solaris software on
a system that complies with Version 2 of the U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency’s Energy Star guidelines—a sun4u SPARC based
system, for example—the Power Management software is installed by
default. After a subsequent reboot, you are prompted to enable or
disable the Power Management software.

Energy Star guidelines require that systems or monitors automatically

enter a “sleep state” (consume 30 watts or less) after the system or
monitor becomes inactive.
probe keyword A syntactical element that extracts attribute information about a
system when using the custom JumpStart method to install. A probe
keyword does not require you to set up a matching condition and run
a profile as required for a rule. See also rule.
profile A text file that defines how to install the Solaris software when using
the custom JumpStart method. For example, a profile defines which
software group to install. Every rule specifies a profile that defines
how a system is to be installed when the rule is matched. You usually
create a different profile for every rule. However, the same profile can
be used in more than one rule. See also rules file.

222 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
profile diskette A diskette that contains all the essential custom JumpStart files in its
root directory (JumpStart directory).
profile server A server that contains all the essential custom JumpStart files in a
JumpStart directory.
private key The decryption key used in public-key encryption.
public key The encryption key used in public-key encryption.
public-key cryptography A cryptographic system that uses two keys: a public key known to
everyone, and a private key known only to the recipient of the
message.
RAID-1 volume A class of volume that replicates data by maintaining multiple copies.
A RAID-1 volume is composed of one or more RAID-0 volumes called
submirrors. A RAID-1 volume is sometimes called a mirror.
RAID-0 volume A class of volume that can be a stripe or a concatenation. These
components are also called submirrors. A stripe or concatenation is the
basic building block for mirrors.
Reduced Network A software group that contains the minimum code that is required to
Support Software Group boot and run a Solaris system with limited network service support.
The Reduced Networking Software Group provides a multiuser
text-based console and system administration utilities. This software
group also enables the system to recognize network interfaces, but
does not activate network services.
/ (root) In a hierarchy of items, the one item from which all other items are
descended. The root item has nothing above it in the hierarchy. / is the
base directory from which all other directories stem, directly or
indirectly. The root directory contains the directories and files critical
for system operation, such as the kernel, device drivers, and the
programs that are used to start (boot) a system.
rule A series of values that assigns one or more system attributes to a
profile. A rule is used in a custom JumpStart installation.
rules file A text file that contains a rule for each group of systems or single
systems that you want to install automatically. Each rule distinguishes
a group of systems, based on one or more system attributes. The
rules file links each group to a profile, which is a text file that defines
how the Solaris software is to be installed on each system in the group.
A rules file is used in a custom JumpStart installation. See also profile.
rules.ok file A generated version of the rules file. The rules.ok file is required
by the custom JumpStart installation software to match a system to a
profile. You must use the check script to create the rules.ok file.
Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) A software library establishing a secure connection between two
parties (client and server) used to implement HTTPS, the secure
version of HTTP.

223
 server A network device that manages resources and supplies services to a
client.
SHA1 (Secure Hashing Algorithm) The algorithm that operates on any input
length less than 264 to produce a message digest.
shareable file systems File systems that are user-defined files such as /export/home and
/swap. These file systems are shared between the active and inactive
boot environment when you use Solaris Live Upgrade. Shareable file
systems contain the same mount point in the vfstab in both the
active and inactive boot environments. Updating shared files in the
active boot environment also updates data in the inactive boot
environment. Shareable file systems are shared by default, but you can
specify a destination slice, and then the file systems are copied.
slice The unit into which the disk space is divided by the software.
software group A logical grouping of the Solaris software (clusters and packages).
During a Solaris installation, you can install one of the following
software groups: Core, End User Solaris Software, Developer Solaris
Software, or Entire Solaris Software, and for SPARC based systems
only, Entire Solaris Software Group Plus OEM Support.
Solaris DVD or CD The Solaris software that is installed on a system, which you can access
images on the Solaris DVDs or CDs or an install server’s hard disk to which
you have copied the Solaris DVD or CD images.
Solaris Flash A Solaris installation feature that enables you to create an archive of
the files on a system, known as the master system. You can then use
the archive to install other systems, making the other systems identical
in their configuration to the master system. See also archive.
Solaris installation A graphical user interface (GUI) or command–line interface (CLI)
program installation program that uses wizard panels to guide you step-by-step
through installing the Solaris software and third-party software.
Solaris Live Upgrade An upgrade method that enables a duplicate boot environment to be
upgraded while the active boot environment is still running, thus
eliminating downtime of the production environment.
Solaris Zones A software partitioning technology used to virtualize operating system
services and provide an isolated and secure environment for running
applications. When you create a non-global zone, you produce an
application execution environment in which processes are isolated
from the all other zones. This isolation prevents processes that are
running in a zone from monitoring or affecting processes that are
running in any other zones. See also global zone and non-global zone.
standalone A computer that does not require support from any other machine.

224 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
state database A database that stores information about the state of your Solaris
Volume Manager configuration. The state database is a collection of
multiple, replicated database copies. Each copy is referred to as a state
database replica. The state database tracks the location and status of all
known state database replicas.
state database replica A copy of a state database. The replica ensures that the data in the
database is valid.
submirror See RAID-0 volume.
subnet A working scheme that divides a single logical network into smaller
physical networks to simplify routing.
subnet mask A bit mask that is used to select bits from an Internet address for
subnet addressing. The mask is 32 bits long and selects the network
portion of the Internet address and 1 or more bits of the local portion.
swap space A slice or file that temporarily holds the contents of a memory area till
it can be loaded back into memory. Also called the /swap or swap file
system.
sysidcfg file A file in which you specify a set of special system configuration
keywords that preconfigure a system.
system configuration file (system.conf) A text file in which you specify the locations of the
sysidcfg file and the custom JumpStart files you want to use in a
WAN boot installation.
time zone Any of the 24 longitudinal divisions of the earth’s surface for which a
standard time is kept.
truststore A file that contains one or more digital certificates. During a WAN boot
installation, the client system verifies the identity of the server that is
trying to perform the installation by consulting the data in the
truststore file.
unmount The process of removing access to a directory on a disk that is attached
to a machine or to a remote disk on a network.
update An installation, or to perform an installation, on a system that changes
software that is of the same type. Unlike an upgrade, an update might
downgrade the system. Unlike an initial installation, software of the
same type that is being installed must be present before an update can
occur.
upgrade An installation that merges files with existing files and saves
modifications where possible.

An upgrade of the Solaris OS merges the new version of the Solaris OS

with the existing files on the system’s disk or disks. An upgrade saves
as many modifications as possible that you have made to the previous
version of the Solaris OS.

225
 upgrade option An option that is presented by the Solaris installation program
program. The upgrade procedure merges the new version of Solaris
with existing files on your disk or disks. An upgrade also saves as
many local modifications as possible since the last time Solaris was
installed.
URL (Uniform Resource Locator) The addressing system used by the server
and the client to request documents. A URL is often called a location.
The format of a URL is protocol://machine:port/document.

A sample URL is http://www.example.com/index.html.

/usr A file system on a standalone system or server that contains many of
the standard UNIX programs. Sharing the large /usr file system with
a server rather than maintaining a local copy minimizes the overall
disk space that is required to install and run the Solaris software on a
system.
utility A standard program, usually furnished at no charge with the purchase
of a computer, that does the computer’s housekeeping.
/var A file system or directory (on standalone systems) that contains system
files that are likely to change or grow over the life of the system. These
files include system logs, vi files, mail files, and uucp files.
volume A group of physical slices or other volumes that appear to the system
as a single logical device. A volume is functionally identical to a
physical disk in the view of an application or file system.

In some command-line utilities, a volume is called a metadevice.

Volume is also called pseudo device or virtual device in standard
UNIX terms.
Volume Manager A program that provides a mechanism to administer and obtain access
to the data on DVD-ROMs, CD-ROMs, and diskettes.
WAN (wide area network) A network that connects multiple local area
networks (LANs) or systems at different geographical sites by using
telephone, fiber-optic, or satellite links.
WAN boot installation A type of installation that enables you to boot and install software over
a wide area network (WAN) by using HTTP or HTTPS. The WAN boot
installation method enables you to transmit an encrypted Solaris Flash
archive over a public network and perform a custom JumpStart
installation on a remote client.
WAN boot miniroot A miniroot that has been modified to perform a WAN boot installation.
The WAN boot miniroot contains a subset of the software in the Solaris
miniroot. See also miniroot.
WAN boot server A web server that provides the configuration and security files that are
used during a WAN boot installation.

226 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
wanboot program The second-level boot program that loads the WAN boot miniroot,
client configuration files, and installation files that are required to
perform a WAN boot installation. For WAN boot installations, the
wanboot binary performs tasks similar to the ufsboot or inetboot
second-level boot programs.
wanboot-cgi program The CGI program that retrieves and transmits the data and files that
are used in a WAN boot installation.
wanboot.conf file A text file in which you specify the configuration information and
security settings that are required to perform a WAN boot installation.
zone See non-global zone

227
228 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
 Index

Numbers and Symbols auto_install_sample directory

# check script, 75, 97
in profiles, 60 copying files to JumpStart directory, 48, 52,
in rules files, 56 55
= (equal sign) in profile field, 78 set_root_pw finish script, 83
! (exclamation mark) rule field, 57
&& (ampersands) rule field, 57
(/) file systems
value set by JumpStart, 163 B
-b option of setup_install_server command, 115
backslash in rules files, 57
backup_media keyword, 132-133
A begin.log file, 78
add_install_client command, JumpStart begin rule field, description, 57
directory access, 49 begin scripts
adding creating derived profiles with, 78, 79
clusters when upgrading, 138 overview, 77
packages and patches with a finish script, 80 permissions, 78
packages from software groups, 152 rule field, 57
rules to rules file, 57 site-specific installation programs, 92
alternative installation programs, 92 boot: cannot open /kernel/unix message, 190
ampersands (&&) rule field, 57 boot_device keyword, 134
AND rule field, 57 boot-disk partition layout, new default (x86
any based systems), 36
probe keyword, description and values, 168 bootenv createbe keyword, 135
rule keyword, description and values, 121, booting into single-user mode, 185
167 bootparams file
arch probe keyword, 167 enabling JumpStart directory access, 50
arch rule keyword, 121, 167 updating, 196
archive Bourne shell scripts in rule fields, 57
JumpStart profile example, 64, 65, 66, 67
keywords, custom JumpStart, 127-132
archive_location keyword, 127-132

229
C CPUs (processors) (Continued)
-c option rule keywords, 121, 167
pfinstall command, 74 creating
add_install_client command, 118, 119 custom_probes.ok file, 97
Can’t boot from file/device message, 190 disk configuration files, 86
CHANGE DEFAULT BOOT DEVICE JumpStart directory, on server, 47
message, 197 local file systems, 142-144
changing directories profiles
image of Solaris SPARC software on local derived, 78
disk, 52 description, 59
to image of Solaris software on local disk, 48 RAID-1 volumes, 144-145
to image of Solaris x86 based software on rules file, 56
local disk, 55 rules.ok file, 75, 97
to JumpStart directory, 75, 97 UFS, 52
check script .cshrc file, 83
custom_probes file validation, 97, 98 custom JumpStart installation, 99
custom_probes.ok file creation, 97 booting and installing, 99
derived profiles and, 79 description, 42
rules file validation, 75, 76, 98 examples, 111, 120
rules.ok file creation, 75 booting and installing, 119
testing rules, 76, 97 check script, 117
client_arch keyword, 136 eng_profile creation, 115
CLIENT MAC ADDR error message, 196 engineering systems setup, 118
client_root profile keyword, 136 JumpStart directory, 115
clock gained xxx days message, 190 marketing_profile creation, 116
cluster profile keyword marketing systems setup, 114, 118
description and values, 137-138, 138 networked, 42
examples, 61 nonnetworked, 40
comments RAID-1 volume profiles, 68, 69
in profiles, 60 rules file editing, 117
in rules files, 56 site setup, 111, 112
concatenation Solaris Flash profile, 64, 66, 67
conceptual overview, 175 standalone system, 40
definition, 175 WAN boot installation profile, 65
information for creating, 181 optional features, 77
configuring, creating disk configuration begin scripts, 77, 79
files, 86 finish scripts, 79, 83
copying overview, 77
JumpStart directory files, 80 site-specific installation programs, 92
JumpStart installation files, 48, 52, 55 overview, 42
Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant preparing, 42, 76
diskette, 53 profile keywords, 126
Core Solaris Software Group, 137-138 tip line connection requirements, 103, 107
Core System Support Software Group custom_probes file
description, 27-29 naming, 94
size, 28 requirements, 94
CPUs (processors) testing custom_probes, 97
probe keywords, 167 validating by using check, 97, 98

230 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
custom_probes.ok file diskettes
creating, 97 copying Solaris 10 Device Configuration
description, 97 Assistant diskette, 53
formatting, 51, 54
JumpStart directory access, 49
x86: JumpStart directory, 51
D diskless clients
dd command, 54 platforms, 136
defaults swap space, 136
derived profile name, 78 disks probe keyword, description and
partitioning values, 167
designating disks, 164 disksize rule keyword, description and
excluding disks, 139 values, 122, 167
software group installed, 138 display
deleting, clusters when upgrading, 138 tip line connection requirements, 103, 107
derived profiles, 78, 79 domainname probe keyword, 167
Developer Solaris Software Group, 137-138 domainname rule keyword, 122, 167
description, 27-29 domains
profile example, 61 probe keyword, 167
size, 28 rule keyword, 122, 167
dfstab file, 48, 115 dontuse profile keyword, 139, 164
directories
changing
to image of Solaris software on local
disk, 48 E
to image of Solaris SPARC software on End User Solaris Software Group, 137-138
local disk, 52 description, 27-29
to image of Solaris x86 based software on size, 28
local disk, 55 eng_profile example, 115
to JumpStart directory, 75, 97 Entire Solaris Software Group, 137-138
JumpStart description, 27-29
adding files, 80 size, 28
Entire Solaris Software Group Plus OEM
copying files, 80
Support, 137-138
copying installation files, 48, 52, 55
description, 27-29
creating directory, 115
size, 28
creating for systems, 51
equal sign (=) in profile field, 78
permissions, 47, 51
/etc/bootparams file
rules file example, 56
enabling JumpStart directory access, 50, 196
sharing directory, 48, 115
/etc/dfs/dfstab file, 48, 115
disk configuration files
/etc/mnttab file, 51
creating
exclamation mark (!) rule field, 57
SPARC based systems, 86
x86 based systems, 88
description, 71, 86
disk space F
planning, 25-29
failed upgrade, rebooting problems, 200
requirements, for software groups, 28
fdformat command, 51, 54

231
fdisk command, 89 hard disks (Continued)
fdisk profile keyword rootdisk values, 163
description and values, 139-141 size
example, 61 probe keywords, 167, 168
files and file systems root space, 136
begin script output, 78 rule keywords, 122, 125, 167, 168
copying swap space
JumpStart directory files using finish diskless client, 136
scripts, 80 maximum size, 137
JumpStart installation files, 48, 52, 55 profile examples, 42, 61
Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant hostaddress probe keyword, 167
diskette, 53 hostaddress rule keyword, 122, 167
creating hostname probe keyword, description and
local file systems, 142-144 values, 167
RAID-1 volumes, 144-145 hostname rule keyword
finish script output, 79 description and values, 122, 167
mounting remote file systems, 141-142 example, 121-125
UFS creation, 52
filesys keyword, 142-144, 144-145
filesys profile keyword
description and values, 141-142 I
examples, 61 install_config command, 50
finish.log file, 79 install_type keyword, 147
finish rule field, description, 58 install_type profile keyword
finish scripts examples, 61
adding packages and patches, 80 requirement, 60, 61
customizing the root environment, 83 testing profiles, 74-75
rule field, 58 installation
setting the system’s root password, 83 compared to upgrade, 19
formatting diskettes, 51
disk space recommendations, 25-29
overview of tasks, 15
installed probe keyword, description and
values, 167
G
installed rule keyword, description and
geo keyword, 146
values, 123, 167
getfile: RPC failed: error 5: RPC Timed out
IP addresses
message, 50
probe keyword, 167
rule keyword, 122, 167

H
hard disks
J
mounting, 141-142
JumpStart directory
partitioning
adding files with finish scripts, 80
designating for partitioning default, 164
copying files
examples, 61
installation files, 48, 52, 55
excluding for partitioning default, 139
using finish scripts, 80
profile keyword, 157

232 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
JumpStart directory (Continued) memsize rule keyword, description and
creating values, 123, 167
diskette for SPARC based systems, 51 metadb profile keyword, 150-151
diskette for x86 based systems, 51, 53 metadevice, See volume
example, 115 microprocessors
server, 47 probe keywords, 167
permissions, 47, 51 rule keywords, 121, 167
rules file example, 56 mirror, See RAID-1 volume
sharing, 47, 115 mnttab file, 51
model probe keyword, description and
values, 167
model rule keyword, description and
K values, 124, 167
karch probe keyword, 167 mounting
karch rule keyword, 123, 167 begin script caution, 78
keywords by Solaris installation, 79
probe, 93 remote file systems, 141-142
Solaris Flash archives, custom multiple lines in rules files, 57
JumpStart, 127-132

N
L names/naming
layout_constraint keyword, 147-150 custom_probes file, 94
le0: No carrier - transceiver cable problem derived profile names, 78
message, 190 host name, 122, 167
locale keyword, 150 rules file, 56, 57
log files system model names, 124, 167
begin script output, 78 network installation, custom JumpStart
finish script output, 79 installation, example, 42
logical AND rule field, 57 network number, 124, 168
network probe keyword, description and
values, 168
network rule keyword, description and
M values, 124, 168
No carrier - transceiver cable problem
majority consensus algorithm, 175
message, 190
marketing_profile example, 116
no_master_check keyword, 152
matching
noneuclidean profile keyword, 152
derived profiles, 78
Not a UFS filesystem message, 190
order for rules, 58, 101, 106
rootdisk values, 163
memory
probe keyword, 167
O
rule keyword, 123, 167
osname probe keyword, 168
swap space size and, 137
osname rule keyword, 124, 168
memsize probe keyword, description and
output files
values, 167
begin script log, 78

233
output files (Continued) probe keywords
finish script log, 79 arch, 167
disks, 167
domainname, 167
hostaddress, 167
P hostname, 167
-p option of check script, 76, 97 installed, 167
packages karch, 167
adding memsize, 167
with a finish script, 80 model, 167
with chroot, 82 network, 168
administration file, 77 osname, 168
requirements when using custom rootdisk, 168
JumpStart, 205 totaldisk, 168
Solaris Live Upgrade probe rule keyword, description and
requirements, 205 values, 125
partitioning processors
examples, 61 probe keywords, 167
excluding disks, 139 rule keywords, 121, 167
fdisk partitions, 61, 139-141 profile keywords, 126, 164
profile keyword, 157, 164 archive_location, 127-132
partitioning keyword, 157 backup_media, 132-133
password, root, 83 boot_device, 134
patches bootenv createbe, 135
adding case sensitivity, 126
with a finish script, 80 client_arch, 136
with chroot, 82 client_root, 136
paths, check script, 76, 97 client_swap, 136
permissions cluster
begin scripts, 78 description and values, 137-138, 138
finish scripts, 79 examples, 61
JumpStart directory, 47, 51 creating state database replicas
pfinstall command, 70 (meatball), 150-151
planning dontuse
disk space, 25-29 description and values, 139
initial installation compared to upgrade, 19 usedisk and, 164
installing over the network, 18 fdisk
overview of tasks, 15 description and values, 139-141
platforms example, 61
diskless client, 136 filesys
matching system attributes and profiles, 58, description and values, 141-142
101, 106 examples, 61
probe keywords, 167 local file systems, 142-144
rule keywords, 123, 167 RAID-1 volumes, 144-145
system model names, 124, 167 remote file systems, 141-142
preparing for installation, with custom forced_deployment, description and
JumpStart, 42, 76 values, 146

234 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
profile keywords (Continued) R
geo -r option of check script, 76, 97
description and values, 146 RAID-0 volume
install_type conceptual overview, 175
description and values, 147 definition, 175
examples, 61 guidelines, 181-185
requirement, 60, 61 RAID-1 volume
layout_constraint, description and and disk geometries, 181
values, 147-150 conceptual overview, 176
local_customization, description and definition, 176
values, 150 guidelines, 181-185
locale, description and values, 150 information for creating, 181
metadb Reduced Network Support Software
description and values, 150-151 Group, 137-138
examples, 61 description, 27-29
no_master_check, description and size, 28
values, 152 release of Solaris software
noneuclidean, 152 installed probe keyword, 167
partitioning installed rule keyword, 123, 167
description and values, 157 osname probe keyword, 168
designating disks, 164 osname rule keyword, 124, 168
examples, 61 remote file systems, mounting, 141-142
excluding disks, 139 replica, 174
root_device, 163 requirements
system_type custom_probes file, 94
description and values, 164 disk space, 25-29
examples, 61 memory, 23
usedisk, description and values, 164 profiles, 56, 60
profiles root (/) file systems, package requirements for
comments in, 60 an inactive boot environment, 205
creating, 59 root (/) file systems, profile example, 42
derived profiles, 78, 79 root_device keyword, 163
description, 59 root environment, customizing with a finish
examples, 61 script, 83
eng_profile, 115 root password, setting with a finish script, 83
rootdisk
marketing_profile, 116
definition, 163
Solaris Flash, 64, 66, 67
slice value for filesys, 142
WAN boot installation, 65
value set by JumpStart, 163
matching systems to, 58, 101, 106
RPC failed: error 5: RPC Timed out message, 50
naming, 60
RPC Timed out message, 50, 195
requirements, 56, 60
rule_keyword rule field, 57
rule field, 57
rule keywords, 121
testing, 74-75
any, description and values, 121, 167
prtvtoc command
arch, 121, 167
SPARC: creating disk configuration file, 87
disksize, description and values, 122, 167
x86: disk configuration file creation, 89
domainname, 122, 167
hostaddress, 122, 167

235
rule keywords (Continued) scripts (Continued)
hostname, 121-125, 167 finish scripts, 79, 83, 92
installed, description and values, 123, 167 security, root password, 83
karch, 123, 167 servers
memsize, 123, 167 JumpStart directory creation, 47
model, 124, 167 root space, 136
network, 124, 168 Service partition, preserving during installation
osname, 124, 168 (x86 based systems), 36
probe, 125 set_root_pw finish script, 83
totaldisk, 125, 168 share command
rule_value rule field, 57 sharing JumpStart directory, 48, 115
rules shareall command, 48, 115
derived profiles, 78, 79 sharing JumpStart directory, 48, 115
examples, 58 SI_PROFILE environment variable, 78
field descriptions, 57, 58 site-specific installation programs, 92
matching order, 58, 101, 106 size
multiple line rules, 57 hard disk
rootdisk matching rules, 163 probe keywords, 167, 168
syntax, 57 root space, 136
testing validity, 76, 97 rule keywords, 122, 125, 167, 168
rules file memory, 123, 167
adding rules, 57 swap space
comments in, 56 diskless client, 136
creating, 56 maximum size, 137
custom JumpStart example, 117 profile examples, 42
description, 56 tip line connection display dimensions, 103,
example, 56 107
multiple line rules, 57 slices
naming, 56, 57 probe keyword, 167
syntax, 57 profile examples, 61
testing rules, 76 rule keyword, 123, 167
validating by using check, 76 software groups
custom JumpStart example, 117 descriptions, 28
derived profiles and, 79 for profiles, 137-138
rules.ok file profile examples, 61
creating, 75 sizes, 28
description, 75 upgrading, 138
rules.ok file, matching order for rules, 58 Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant
rules.ok file diskette, 53
matching order for rules, 101, 106 Solaris software
groups, 137-138
profile examples, 61
upgrading, 138
S release or version
-s option of add_install_client command, 119 installed probe keyword, 167
scripts installed rule keyword, 123, 167
begin scripts, 77, 79, 92 osname probe keyword, 168
Bourne shell scripts in rule fields, 57 osname rule keyword, 124, 168

236 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005
Solaris Volume Manager, creating volumes tip line connection requirements, 103
during custom JumpStart, example, 61 token ring card, booting error with, 195
standalone systems totaldisk probe keyword, 168
custom JumpStart installation example, 40 totaldisk rule keyword, 125, 168
profile examples, 61 transceiver cable problem message, 190
starting, check script, 75, 76 troubleshooting
state database booting from network with DHCP, 196
conceptual overview, 174-175 booting from wrong server, 196
definition, 174-175 general installation problems
state database replicas, 174 booting from the network with
basic operation, 175 DHCP, 196
creating multiple on a single slice, 180 booting the system, 196
definition, 174
location, 180, 181
minimum number, 181
usage, 175 U
stty command, 103, 107 UFS, 52
submirror, See See RAID-0 volume Unknown client error message, 189
SUNWCall group, 137-138 upgrade
SUNWCprog group, 137-138 compared to initial installation, 19
SUNWCreq group, 137-138 custom JumpStart installation, 99
SUNWCrnet group, 137-138 disk space recommendations, 25-29
SUNWCuser group, 137-138 failed upgrade, 200
SUNWCXall group, 137-138 overview of tasks, 15
swap file systems profile keywords, 138, 147, 157
diskless client swap space, 136 usedisk profile keyword, description and
memory size and, 137 values, 164
profile examples, 42
size determination, 137
system_type profile keyword
description and values, 164 V
examples, 61 validating
custom_probes file
testing, 97
using check, 98
T rules files
testing
custom JumpStart example, 117
profiles, 71, 74-75
derived profiles and, 79
validating custom_probes files
testing rules, 76
testing custom_probes, 97
using check, 75, 76, 98
using check, 97
/var/sadm/system/logs/begin.log
validating rules files
file, 78
custom JumpStart example, 117
/var/sadm/system/logs/finish.log
derived profiles and, 79
file, 79
testing rules, 76
variables
using check, 75, 76, 98
SI_PROFILE, 78
timed out RPC error, 195
SYS_MEMSIZE, 73
tip line connection display requirements, 107

237
version of Solaris software
installed probe keyword, 167
installed rule keyword, 123, 167
osname probe keyword, 168
osname rule keyword, 124, 168
volcheck command, 51, 53, 54
volume
conceptual overview, 173
naming conventions, 182
uses, 172
virtual disk, 172
Volume Manager
copying, 51, 54
Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant
diskette, 53
Solaris 10 Device Configuration Assistant
image, 54

W
WARNING: CHANGE DEFAULT BOOT
DEVICE, 197
WARNING: clock gained xxx days
message, 190
wrapping lines in rules files, 57

238 Solaris 10 Installation Guide: Custom JumpStart and Advanced Installations • January 2005